- 825.20 KB
- 2021-10-12 发布
- 1、本文档由用户上传，淘文库整理发布，可阅读全部内容。
- 2、本文档内容版权归属内容提供方，所产生的收益全部归内容提供方所有。如果您对本文有版权争议，请立即联系网站客服。
- 3、本文档由用户上传，本站不保证质量和数量令人满意，可能有诸多瑕疵，付费之前，请仔细阅读内容确认后进行付费下载。
- 网站客服QQ：403074932
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
1
◇总第 1 课时
Unit 1 Where did you go on vacation?
Section A 1 (1a-2d)
一、 教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 能掌握以下单词： anyone, anywhere, wonderful, quite a few, most, something, nothing, everyone, of
course, myself, yourself
能掌握以下句型：
① —Where did you go on vacation? —I went to the mountains.
② —Where did Tina to on vacation? —She went to the beach.
③ —Did you go with anyone? —Yes, I did./No, I didn ’t.
2) 能了解以下语法：
—复合不定代词 someone, anyone, something, anything 等 的用法。
—yourself, myself 等反身代词的用法。
3） 一般过去时态的特殊疑问句，一般疑问句及其肯定、否定回答。
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
学会用一般过去时进行信息交流，培养学生的环保意识，热爱大自然。
二、 教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 用所学的功能语言交流假期去了什么旅行。
2) 掌握本课时出现的新词汇。
2. 教学难点：
1) 复合不定代词 someone, anyone, something, anything 等 的用法。
2) yourself, myself 等反身代词的用法。
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Lead-in
1. 看动画片来进入本课时的主题谈论上周末做了些什么事情，谈论过去发生的事情。
Ⅱ. Presentation
1. Show some pictures on the big screen. Let Ss read the expressions.
2. Focus attention on the picture. Ask: What can you see? Say: Each picture shows
something a person did in the past. Name each activity and ask students to repeat:
Stayed at home, Went to mountains, went to New York City 6. Went to the beach,
visited my uncle, visited museums, went to summer camp
3. Now, please match each phrase with one of the pictures next to the name of the
activity ， point to the sample answer.
4. Check the answers. Answers: 1. f 2. b 3. g 4. e 5. c 6. a 7. d
III. Listening
1. Point to the picture on the screen.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
2
Say: Look at the picture A. Where did Tina go on vacation? She went to mountains.
Ask: What did the person do in each picture?
2. Play the recording the first time.
3. Play the recording a second time.
Say: There are three conversations. The people talk about what did on vacation. Listen to the recording and
write numbers of the names in the right boxes of the picture.
4. Check the answers.
IV ．Pair work
1. Point out the sample conversation. Ask two Ss to read the conversation to the class.
2. Now work with a partner. Make your own conversation about the people in the picture.
3. Ss work in pairs. As they talk, move around the classroom and give any help they need.
4. Let some pairs act out their conversations.
V. Listening
1. Tell Ss they will hear a conversation about three students ’ conversations. Listen for the first time and fill in
the chart. Then listen again and check Yes, or No.
2. Let Ss read the phrases in the chart of 2b.
3. Play the recording the first time. Ss listen and fill in the chart.
4. Play the recording a second time for the Ss to check “ Yes, I did. ” or “ No, I didn ’ t. ”
5. Check the answers with the Ss.
VI. Pair work
1. Let two Ss read the conversation between Grace, Kevin and Julie.
2. Let Ss work in pairs and try to role-play the conversation.
3. Ask some pairs to act out their conversations.
VII . Role-play
1. First let Ss read the conversation and match the people and places they went.
2. Let Ss act out the conversations in pairs.
3. Some explanations in 2d.
Homework:
用英语询问你的一位好朋友，她（他）假期去了哪里？看到了什么？并将此对话写在作业上。
A: Where did you go ⋯？ B: I went to ⋯
A: Did you see ⋯ B: Yes, I did. / No, I didn ’ t.
板书设计：
Section A 1 (1a-2d)
anyone, someone, everyone, something, anything, everything
yourself, myself
Where did you go on vacation? Did you do anything special?
I went to New York City. Did you go anywhere interesting?
Where did she go on vacation？ most of the time
She went to the mountains.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
3
◇总第 2 课时
Section A 2 (Grammar focus-3c)
一、 教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 复习所学的重难点句型及句式结构。
2）总结学习 anyone, someone, everyone, something, anything, nothing 等不定代词的用法。
3）练习运用所学的句型及句式结构。
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
学会用一般过去时进行信息交流，培养学生的环保意识，热爱大自然。
二、 教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 用所学的功能语言交流假期去了什么旅行。
2) 复习运用本课时出现的新词汇。
2. 教学难点：
1) 复合不定代词 someone, anyone, something, anything 等 的用法。
2) 阅读填空能力的提高。
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision
1. Free talk: Ask Ss the questions: Where did you go on vacation?
Ss try to answer the questions.
2. Review the usage of “复合不定代词 ”
Ⅱ. Grammar focus.
1. 学生阅读 Grammar Focus 中的句子，然后做填空练习。
1. 你去了什么地方去度假？ ______ ______ you go on ___________?
2. 我去了纽约市。 I _______ _______ New York City.
3. 你和什么人别一起去的吗？ ______ ______ go out with ________ ？
4. 不，没有别人在这儿。 每个人都在度假。 No. ____ ______ was here. ________ was on _________.
3. 学生们完成填空试题后，可以打开课本检查答案，对错误的句子，单独进行强化记忆。
Ⅲ. Try to Find
一、复合不定代词总结：
1. some, any, no, every 与 -one, -thing 可以组成八个不定代词，他们分别是：
someone, ________ _______ ________ __________ __________ ______________ 。
2. 带 some 的复合不定代词常用于肯定句中；带 any 的复合不定代词常用于否定句或一般疑问句中。
例如：
我想吃点东西。 I ’ d like _____________ to eat.
今天有人给我打电话吗？
Did ________ call me today?
3. 当形容词修饰不定代词时，应放在其后面。例如：这本书里有什么新东西吗？
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
4
Is there __________ _______ in this book?
今天没有什么特别的事。
There ’ s ___________ ________ today.
4. 由 some, any, no, every 构成的复合不定代词作主语时，都作单数看待，其谓语动词用单数第三人称
形式。例如：
Something is wrong with my watch.
Well, everyone wants to win.
Nobody knows what the future will be like.
There is something for everyone at Greenwood Park.
5. 除 no one 以外，其他复合不定代词都写成一个词。
二、学生们读上面的探究试题，并合作探究完成。
三、看大屏幕，校对答案。
Ⅳ. Practice
Work on 3a:
1. Let Ss look at the conversation in 3a. First let one student read the words in the box.
2. Tell Ss to read the conversation and fill in the blanks.
3. 方法指导：
首先，应通读对话，掌握短文大意；其次，回顾一下刚才学习的有关复合不定代词的用法。
然后，仔细阅读每个句子，根据空格前后的词语进行推敲。比如，第一句话是一个一般疑问句，
空格前有 do 一词，可知空格处应填 anything 一词，意为 “做什么事情 ”。其他类似。
学生们，按老师指导的方法进行阅读，并逐句推敲每空应填什么词，在实际的运用提高自己的阅
读能力、分析能力及综合运用能力。
最后，教师与同学们一起校对答案，并对学生们有疑问的地方进行解释。
Explanation : 反身代词
Work on 3b:
1. Tell Ss to fill in the blanks in the e-mail message with the words in the box.
2. 方法指导：
首先，应通读全文，掌握短文大意；其次，回顾一下刚才学习的有关复合不定代词的用法。
然后，仔细阅读每个句子，根据空格前后的词语进行推敲。比如，第一句话是一个一般疑问句，
空格前有 do 一词，可知空格处应填 anything 一词，意为 “做什么事情 ”。其他类似。
学生们，按老师指导的方法进行阅读，并逐句推敲每空应填什么词，在实际的运用提高自己的阅
读能力、分析能力及综合运用能力。
最后，教师与同学们一起校对答案，并对学生们有疑问的地方进行解释。
Ⅴ. Group work
1. Work on 3c: Ask your group questions about their vacation. Then tell the class your results.
2. Fill in the blanks according to the answers.
3. Try to make a report in each group. Then let one student read the report to the class.
(最后，可以经学生们评议来推举最有能力的小组）
Ⅵ. Exercises
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
5
1. If time is enough, do some more exercises on big screen.
用恰当的不定代词填空。
1. _________ found Mr. Li ’ s keys and gave them back to him yesterday.
2. ─ Did you see ___________ in the big box?
─ No, I didn ’ t. There ’ s ___________ in it.
3. _________ helped the little boy. He did it himself.
4. My watch doesn ’ t work. ___________ is wrong with it.
5. ─ Hello, ___________!
─ Hello, Mr. Smith!
6. ─ How’ s it going, Jack?
─ Great! ____________ is going well.
7. ─ Did you go to the beach with
___________?
─ Yes. I went there with my cousin.
Homework
1. 背诵 Grammar focus 部分。
2. 复习复合不定代词及反身代词的用法。
板书设计
Section A 2 Grammar focus-3c
anyone, someone, everyone, something, anything, nothing
Did you go out with anyone?
No. No one was here. Everyone was on vacation.
Did you buy anything special?
Yes, I bought something for my father.
No, I bought nothing.
How was the food? Everything tastes good.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
6
◇总第 3 课时
Section B 1a-2e
一、 教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 能掌握以下单词： decide, try, paragliding, feel like, bird, bicycle, building, trader, wonder, difference,
top, wait, umbrella, wet, because of, below, enough, hungry
2) 能掌握以下句型：
① Where did ⋯?
② What did ⋯?
③ How was⋯ ？ / How were ⋯?
④ Did she/he ⋯?
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
学生了解我国不同地方的人们上学的方式，了解还有一些贫困地区的孩子们需要我们去帮助他们。
二、 教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 掌握本课时出现的生词及表达方式。
2) 进行听力训练，提高综合听说能力。
3）阅读短文，获得相关信息，提高学生们的综合阅读能力。
2. 教学难点
1. 听力训练
2. 阅读 2b 部分的短文并完成相关要求。
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision
1. Daily greeting.
2. Check the homework. Let some Ss report where did they go on vacation.
3. Review the “复合不定代词 ”
4. Review the “反身代词 ”
5. Show a movie of paragliding.
Ⅱ. Writing
Work on 1a:
1. Point to the six words. delicious, expensive, exciting, cheap, terrible, boring
2. Read the words and let Ss read after the teacher.
3. Point to the last picture and say: This is a cak e. It ’ s delicious. Then do the same thing for all six pictures.
4. Let Ss match each word with a picture. Then check the answers with the students.
⋯
Work on 1b:
1. Explain the meaning of “ words ” and “ words. ”
2. Let Ss discuss the words they know and write them down on the line.
3. Let some Ss read out their words to the class. (Or let some Ss write their words on the blackboards.)
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
7
Ⅲ. Listening
Work on 1c:
1. T: Now let's work on 1c. First, let one student read the questions aloud. Make sure all the Ss know the
meanings of the questions.
2. Play the recording for the first time. Ss only listen.
3. Then play the recording for the second time. Ss listen and answer the questions.
4. Then play the recording for the third time for the Ss to check the answers.
5. Ss listen to the tape and circle the words and phrases they hear.
6. Check the answers: (Look at the big screen.)
Work on 1d:
1. Tell Ss this time they have to write down what Lisa said about her vacation, the people, the fun park, the
food and the store.
2. Then play the recording for the second time. Ss listen and write down the words.
3. Then play the recording for the third time for the Ss to check the answers.
听力指导：在听时要抓重点内容。第一次听要求我们回答问题，因此在听的时候，应重点将与这些问
题相关的内容方面的听清，其他作为非重点内容。另外，要注意要速记下重点内容。
在完成 1d 部分时要注意听的重点是放在 Lisa 对这五个方面的事情所做评价， 因此应听清楚那些形容词。
Ⅳ. Pair work
1. Tell Ss to ask and answer about Lisa ’ s vacation. Begin your questions with the following sentences. For
example:
Where did you go on vacation?
I went to New York City.
Did you go with anyone?
Yes, I did.
2. Ss work in pairs and ask and answer about Lisa ’ s vacations.
3. Let some pairs come to the front and ask and answer in pairs.
Ⅴ. Discussion
1. Tell Ss to work in groups. Discuss the questions together.
What do people usually do on vacation?
What activities do you find enjoyable?
2. Give Ss some possible answers:
People usually go to some places of interest for vacation.
I find fishing enjoyable.
3. Ss discuss the two questions. Write down their answers. Let some group report their answers.
VI. Reading
Work on 2b:
1. T: Now we ’ ll read Jane ’ s diary entries about her vacation and answer the questions.
Did Jane have a good time on Monday?
What about on Tuesday?
2. Ss read the diary quickly and find the answers to the questions.
3. Check the answers with the Ss.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
8
Work on 2c:
1. Let some Ss read Jane ’ s diary entries again. Fill in the chart.
2. Let Ss look at the chart first. Then let them read and fill in the chart.
3. Check the answers. (Look at the big screen.)
Work on 2d:
1. Tell Ss they should read the conversation about Jane ’ s trip to Penang again and use the information in the
diary entries.
2. Ss read the conversation about Jane ’ s trip to Penang first then try to fill in the blanks.
3. 方法指导：首先，应读通读整个对话一遍，理解对话的大意；然后，认真阅读有空格的上下句的内
容，结合日记的内容，确定空格处的内容。 最后，再通读一遍对话，综合日记的内容看每个空格处是
否贴切。
3. Ss read carefully and try to write down the words in the blanks.
4. Check the answers with the class.
Work on 2e:
1. 告诉学生们这篇日记是 Jane在七月十八日又一次参观了 Penang Hill 后，所写的。读日记，并用括
号中单词的正确形式填空。
2. 方法指导：首先，再次明确这是一篇日记，因此应用一般过去时态；然后，通读一遍日记的内容，
了解大体内容；最后，综合每句的内容，用括号中动词的正确的形式填空。
3. Ss read the diary and try to fill in the blanks.
4. Check the answers. (Look at the big screen)
5. 对动词一般过去时的规则形式与不规则形式，再复习一遍。
Homework
用所给动词的适当形式填空。
1. My mother ______ (buy) a new schoolbag for me yesterday.
2. When _____ you _____ (start) to learn English?
3. My aunt ______ (take) us to dinner at a restaurant but the food _______ (is) not good at all.
4. When I _______ (am) in America, I _______ (make) a lot of new friends.
5. They _______ (have) a great sale last weekend.
板书设计：
◇总第 4 课时
Section B1 1a-2e
Words: decide, try, paragliding, feel like, bird, bicycle, building, trader,
wonder, difference, top, wait, umbrella, wet, because of, below, enough, hungry
① Where did⋯?
② What did⋯?
③ How was⋯？ / How were⋯?
④ Did she/he⋯?
Did Jane have a good time on Monday?
What about on Tuesday?
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
9
Section B 2 3a-Self check
一、 教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 复习询问或谈论假期去某地旅行的经历。
2) 能够综合运动词的一般过去时形式，并能正确填空。
3) 总结回顾动词过去式的规则变化不规则变化。
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
1) 学生了解我国不同地方的人们上学的方式，了解还有一些贫困地区的孩子们需要我们去帮助他们。
2）通过谈论假期旅行的经历，明白在旅行时应注意保护环境。
二、 教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 能综合运用所的重难点词汇来完成相关任务。
2）能运用英语根据相关提示来记自己某次旅行的经历。
2. 教学难点：
能运用英语根据相关提示来记自己某次旅行的经历。
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision
1. Let Ss read the passage about Jane ’ s vacation to Malaysia. Then fill in the blanks.
2. Check the answers.
Ⅱ. Discussion
1. Show some pictures of the some places of interest. Tell Ss the name of them.
e.g. the Great Wall, Summer Palace, Tian ’ anmen Square, a Beijing hutong ⋯
2. Let Ss discuss what they can do, eat, buy ⋯ in those places.
Ⅲ. Writing
1. Tell Ss they went to one of these places of interest last summer vacation. With the help of the words in the
box, try to fill in the blanks of the diary.
2. Let some Ss read the words in the box.
3. Ss read the diary and try to fill in the blanks with the words in the box.
2. 阅读指导 :
首先，应阅读日记一遍，了解日记的大意。然后，细读每一句，根据上下文文意来确定每个空格处应
填的词汇。比如：读第一行可知此处是填空记日记时的时间，空格后面有日期，因此空格处应填月份
August 。读第二句话，可知空格处应填写天气的词汇，故应选 hot and sunny。其他类似。
3. Ss read the passage then fill in the blanks with the words in the box.
4. Check the answers.
Ⅳ. Practice
Work on 3b:
1. Let some Ss read the questions aloud to the Ss. Make sure they know the meaning of the questions.
2. Let Ss work in pairs to ask and answer the questions. Write their answers on a piece of paper.
3. Get some pairs read out their answers.
4. Check the verbs forms.
Work on 3c:
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
10
1. Tell Ss to write a travel diary like Jane ’ s on Page 5. Use your notes in 3b.
2. 写作指导：
1. 本文为写日记， 因此应用一般过去时态。应注意动词的过去式形式。
2. 回顾一下在 3b 中所回答的问题的情况，然后将这些句子按恰当的逻辑顺序排列在一起，形成
条理清晰的一段文字。
3. 可以根据旅行的经历再添加一些恰当的想象的句子。
4. 再次，阅读一遍短文，看有没有错误的句子。
3. Ss write their diary by themselves. Give any help they need.
4. Let some Ss read their diary to the class.
Ⅴ. Self check 1
1. 让学生们看自己的笔记，复习相关复合不定代词的用法。
2. Let Ss read the small conversation and choose the correct words in the box to fill in the blanks.
3. Check the answers with the Ss.
4. Explain any problem that Ss can ’ t understand.
Ⅵ. Self check 2
1. 让学生们看自己的笔记，复习相关动词过去式的规则变化及不规则变化。
2. Ss read the passage and fill in the blanks.
3. Let some Ss write their answers on the blackboard.
4. Check answers with the Ss.
5. Explain any problem that Ss can ’ t understand.
Ⅶ. Group work
1. Tell Ss what they should in this activity. Imagine you are all foreigners on vacation in China. You meet each
other at the airport on your way home. Talk about what you did on your vacation.
2. Ss work in groups of four and ask and answer about their vacations in China.
3. Let some pairs act out their conversations in front of the class.
Homework
1. Review Section B.
2. 阅读 Self check 2 的短文，并强化记忆所列举动词的一般过去式形式。
3. 总结全单元出现的不规则变化的动词的一般过去式，并努力记住他们。
板书设计：
◇总第 5 课时
Section B 2 3a-Self check
3a: August, hot and sunny, a Beijing hutong, beautiful, bought something
special, it was interesting, Beijing duck, delicious, tired
3b: Where did you go? What food did you eat?
Did you go with anyone? What did you like best?
How was the weather? Did you dislike anything?
What did you do every day? How did you feel about the trip?
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
11
Unit 2 How often do you exercise?
Section A 1 (1a-2d)
一、 教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 能掌握以下单词： housework, hardly, ever, hardly ever, once, twice, Internet, program, full, swing,
swing dance, maybe, least, at least
能掌握以下句型：
① —What does he do on weekends? —He usually watches TV.
② —How often do you watch TV? — I watch TV every day.
③ —Does he go shopping? —No, he never go shopping.
2) 能了解以下语法：
频度副词及一般现在时简单谈论周末活动情况。
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
通过本单元的学习，养成健康的饮食习惯，保证充足的睡眠时间，进行合理的运动锻炼，以保持
健康的体魄。培养学生的逻辑表述能力，激发学生的积极思维，并使学生互相了解，增进友谊，加强
人际交往，以形成良好的人际关系。
二、 教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 对 6 个频度副词细微差异的理解及使用。
2) 弄清一般现在时在不同人称下动词形式及提问的变化。
2. 教学难点：
1) 第三人称单数谓语动词在此核心句型中的运用。
2) 谈论课余时间的各项活动，以及初步认识和使用频率副词。
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Lead in
Talk about your last weekend ’ s activities.
Ⅱ. Presentation
(1) 教师问： “ What do you usually do on weekends ? ” (并且板书 )让学生根据自己的实际回答 I
usually ⋯⋯ on weekends.
(2) 教师出示动词卡片 watch TV ，read books，exercise，swimplay football 、go shopping、 go to movies
让学生回答。
（3）点击鼠标屏幕上出现频率副词及相关的百分比。
always (100%) usually(80%) often (30-50%)
sometimes (20%) hardly ever(5%) never (0%)
领读频率副词，让学生快速认读。
Ⅲ. Writing
1. Look at the picture. Discuss with your partners. Make a list of the weekend activities.
2. Let some Ss read out their activities. Let other Ss add more activities.
Ⅳ. Listening
1. Let a student read the words aloud. Make sure all the Ss know the meaning of the words.
2. Tell Ss to listen and write the letters from the picture above on the line below.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
12
3. Play the tape for the first time. Ss listen and fill in the blanks.
4. Play the tape for the second time for the Ss to check the answers.
Ⅴ. Pair work
1. Act out the conversation with a student.
2. Let Ss talk about the pictures in 1a in pairs.
3. Let some Ss act out their conversations.
Ⅵ. Listening
Work on 2a:
1. Let Ss read the phrases in the chart.
2. Tell Ss that Cheng Tao is taking about how often he does these activities. Play the recording for the first
time. Ss listen and number the activities [1-5].
3. Play the recording for the second time for the Ss to check the answers.
Work on 2b:
1. Tell Ss they will hear the recording again. This time, listen and match the activities in 2a with how often
Cheng Tao does them.
2. Ss listen and math the activities with the phrases.
3. Check the answers.
Ⅶ. Pair work
1. Ask one student how often he/she watch TV as a model.
T: Hi, S1. How often do you watch TV?
S1: I watch TV every day.
T: What ’ s your favorite program?
S1: Animal world.
T: How often do you watch it?
S1: Twice a week.
2. Let one student read the activities in the chart. Tell them these new words:
favorite website ( 最喜欢的网站 )；favorite sport ( 最喜欢的运动 )
3. Ss work with their partners. Then ask some pairs to act out their conversations.
Ⅷ. Role-play
1. Read the conversation by themselves, then match the activity with the right time.
Dance lesson Tuesday
Piano lesson Wednesday and Friday
Playing tennis Monday
2. Let the Ss read the conversation after you.
3. Ss work with a partner and act out the conversation. Then let some pairs to act out the conversation in front
of the class.
Homework:
1. Act out the conversation after class.
2. 翻译句子
① 周末你通常做什么事情？我通常踢足球。
____________________________________
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
13
② 周末他们做什么事情？他们经常去看电影。
___________________________________
板书设计：
◇总第 6 课时
Section A 2 (Grammar Focus-3c)
Section A 1(1a-2d)
—What does he do on weekends?
—He usually watches TV.
—How often do you watch TV?
—I watch TV every day.
—Does he go shopping?
—No, he never go shopping.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
14
一、 教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 复习运用频率词汇及询问活动频率。
2) 一般现在时态的熟练运用。
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
通过本单元的学习，养成健康的饮食习惯，保证充足的睡眠时间，进行合理的运动锻炼，以保持
健康的体魄。培养学生的逻辑表述能力，激发学生的积极思维，并使学生互相了解，增进友谊，加强
人际交往，以形成良好的人际关系。
二、 教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) — How often do you /does he(she) ⋯ .? — He usually ⋯
2） 频度副词的用法 : always; usually ; often ; sometimes; hardly ever; never
2. 教学难点：
1) 第三人称单数谓语动词在此核心句型中的运用。
2) 能够谈论课余时间的各项活动，以及初步认识和使用频率副词。
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision
1. Ask and answer some oral questions on how often exercise.
2. Check the homework and have a dictation of some new words.
Ⅱ. Grammar Focus.
1. 学生阅读 Grammar Focus 中的句子，然后做填空练习。
1) 你通常在周未做什么？
______ ____ you _______ do on weekends?
2) 我总是去运动。 I _______ _______.
3) 他们总是在周未做什么事情？
______ _____ they ________ on weekends？
4) 他们经常帮助做家务。
They ________ _______ with housework.
5) 她在周未做什么？
What ______ she _______ on weekends?
6) 她有时候去购物。
She _________ _______ _________.
你多久去看电影一次？
_____ _____ do you go to the _________?
7) 我可能一个月去看一次。
I go to movies ______ _______ a ________.
8) 他多久看一次电视 ?
______ _______ does he watch TV
9) 他几乎不看电视。
He ________ _______ watches TV.
10) 他去购物吗 ? ______ ___ go shopping?
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
15
11) 不，他从不去购物。
No, he _______ ______ shopping.
3. 学生们完成填空试题后，可以打开课本检查答案，对错误的句子，单独进行强化记忆。
Ⅲ. Try to Find
1. Tell Ss try to find the answers.
A: how often 意为 “ __________ ”，是用于提问表示 __________的特殊疑问词组。其答语应为表示
________ 的副词或副词词组。句子的时态一般是 _____________，也可以是一般过去时。翻译：
你多久去游泳一次？一个星期三次。 __________________________________.
_________________________________
B: 一般现在时态
在一般现在时的一般疑问句中，当主语为第三人称复数或单数时，需要句子前加助动词 Do 或
Does 。
他们通常在周未锻炼吗？
___ they often ________ on weekends?
她一周上网二次吗？
_____ she _____ the Internet twice a week?
Ⅳ. Practice
1. Tell Ss to make questions.
2. Then try to ask and answer questions about the questions.
3. Ask some Ss to ask and answer with their partners in front of the class.
方法指导：应通读所有词汇，掌握句子大意；然后，找出句子中的特殊疑问词。最后，按 “特殊疑
问词 + 一般疑问句？ ” 的结构来构成句子。其他类似。
学生们，按老师指导的方法进行阅读，并逐句推敲组成正确的特殊疑问句，并理解掌握特殊疑问
句的句式结构，在实际的运用中提高自己的阅读能力、分析能力及综合运用能力。
Ⅴ. Group work
1. Let Ss work in groups of six or eight.
2. Tell Ss discuss what activities they do to improve their English. Then write the activities in the chart.
3. Ask their group mates the questions and fill in the chart.
4. Try to make a report about their partners.
(最后，可以经学生们评议来推举最有能力的小组）
Ⅵ. Exercises
If time is enough, do some more exercises on big screen.
1）I usually go shopping on weekends. ( 变为一般疑问句 )
______ you usually _____ shopping on weekends?
2） She often helps with housework at home. ( 同上 )
_____ she often ______ with housework?
3） They visit their grandparents once a month. (提问 )
______ ______ ____ they visit their grandparents?
4） She always watch TV after dinner. ( 提问 )
_____ _____ _____ she ______ TV after dinner?
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
16
5） Maybe your mother is in the kitchen. ( 改为同义句 )
Your mother _______ ______ in the kitchen.
Homework
Do a survey:
What does he/she do on weekends?
板书设计
◇总第 7 课时
Section B 1a-2e
一、 教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 能掌握以下单词： percent， online, television ， although, body ，such as, mind，together, die, writer
2) 能掌握以下句型：
Section A 2 Grammar Focus-3c
—How often do you /does he(she) ⋯.?—He usually⋯
频度副词的用法 :
always; usually ; often ; sometimes; hardly ever; never
how often 意为 “__________”，是用于提问表示 __________的特殊疑问词
组。其答语应为表示 ________ 的副词或副词词组。句子的时态一般是
_____________，也可以是一般过去时。翻译：
你多久去游泳一次？一个星期三次。
__________________________________.
_________________________________
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
17
① not ⋯at all
② The best way to ⋯ is ⋯.
③ such as ⋯
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
了解其他学生们的日常生活情况，让学生们知道应如何安排自己的日常生活，向其他有良好生活
习惯的人们学习，做一个有良好习惯的人。
二、 教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 掌握本课时出现的生词及表达方式。
2) 进行听力训练，提高综合听说能力。
3）阅读短文，获得相关信息，提高学生们的综合阅读能力。
2. 教学难点
1. 听力训练
2. 阅读 2b 部分的短文并完成相关要求。
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision
1. Daily greeting.
2. Check the homework. Let some Ss report what he/she does on weekends.
Ⅱ. Presentation
1. T: Show some pictures of food or drink on the big screen. Ss read the words then discuss they are healthy or
unhealthy.
2. Work on 1a. Read the words with the pictures then match the words with the pictures.
Ⅲ. Find
1. Show a list of words of food and drinks on the big screen. Then list them into “ healthy ” or “ unhealthy ”
2. Check the answer with the Ss.
3. Ask and answer questions about the pictures on 1a. Make a model to the Ss:
T: How often do you drink milk, S1?
S1: I drink milk every day.
T: Do you like it?
S1: No, but my mother wants me to drink it. She says it ’ s good for my health.
Ⅳ. Listening
Work on 1c :
1. Tell Ss that a reporter is interviewing Bill and Tina what their eating habits are. Listen to the recording and
find the answer to these two questions: Is Bill healthy? Is Tina healthy? Listen and find the answers to the
questions.
3. T: Now let's work on 1d. First, let one student read the sentences and try to know the meaning of the
sentences.
4. Play the first time, Ss just listen. Play the tape for the second time for the Ss to listen and find the answers.
5. Check the answers:
6. 听力指导：学生先要抓住这六个问题的意思。带着这六个问题去对话。在听的时候，应重点将与这
六个问题相关的回答听清，其他作为非重点内容。
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
18
Ⅴ. Pair work
1. Work in pairs. Ask and answer questions. SA is the reporter. SB is Tina or Bill. Ask and answer questions.
Then change roles.
e.g. ─ How often do you exercise?
─ I exercise every day?
─ And how often do you ⋯ ?
─ I exercise ⋯
2. Teacher can walk around the classroom, and give some help to the Ss.
Work on 2a:
1. Let Ss discuss the activities with their classmates and rank these activities according to how often you think
your classmates do them.
2. Let some Ss tell their answers.
Ⅵ. Reading
1. T: Here are the results of what the students in No. 5 High School do in their free time. Read the passage
quickly and find the answers to the two questions:
1) How many kinds of free time activities are mentioned in the passage?
_______________________________
2) What is the best way to relax? _________________________________
2. Read the passage carefully and complete the pie chart below.
Ss read the passage and try to fill in the pie chart. Then check the answers together.
Ⅶ. Reading
1. T: Now let ’ s read through the five questions. Make sure the Ss know the meaning of the questions. Then let
Ss read the passage again and try to find the answers to the questions.
2. 方法指导：首先，应读懂五个题目的意思；然后，认真带着问题去阅读短文。在短文中找到相关问
题的回答依据，并回答上每个问题。最后，检查一下自己的回答是否正确。
3. Ss read carefully and try to find the answers to the questions.
4. Check the answers with the class.
Ⅷ. Practice
Work on 2d:
1. T: Now let ’ s make some sentences with the percentages using always, usually or sometimes.
2. 方法指导：首先，明确 always, usually 及 sometimes 所代表的百分比数值；然后，看再看每个百分比
数在短文中相关的活动；最后，造出恰当的句子。
3. Ss read the passage again and try to make some new sentences. Check the answers with each others.
Work on 2e:
1. Let Ss read through the activities in the chart first. Select one activity from them. Then ask their classmates
how often they do this activity and make a pie chart.
2. Ss work in groups. Ask and answer questions then fill in the chart.
3. Make a pie chart like those in 2b.
4. Then try to make a short report like the report in 2b.
Homework
1. 读 2b 中的短文。
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
19
2. 根据 2e 的调查结果写一个报告。
板书设计：
◇总第 8 课时
Section B 2 3a-Self Check
一、 教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 复习询问或谈论别人饮食、锻炼的频率、休息的时间及选择不同频率的理由。
2) 能够运用所给的提示，完成对某人饮食习惯的描写。
3) 总结回顾所有的频率词，并学会运用所学的频率词来谈论某人的生活习惯。
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
Section B 1 1a-2c
percent，online, television，although, body，such as, mind，together, die, writer
percent 名词，意为“百分之⋯⋯ ”，
【注意】 percent做主语时， 谓语动词的数要根据其后面的名词来确定。 如：
Fifty percent of the apples are bad.
50%的苹果们都坏了
2. not ⋯ at all 意为“一点也不” ， not 应和 be 动词、助动词或情态连用。
例如：
那个故事一点也没有趣。
The story isn ’t interesting at all.
3. although 连词， “尽管，虽然；即使 ” 注意： although 引导的从句不能
与 but 连用。
尽管他离家很早，但是他还是迟到了。
Although he left home early, he was late. (√)
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
20
1) 通过小组活动对话、讨论、调查等活动。培养学生们的合作意识和团队精神。
2） 谈论日常生活行为习惯，提倡合理安排自己的生活，养成良好的生活习惯，享受丰富多彩的校
园生活。
二、 教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 能运所给的提示词来描写个人的饮食起居等方面的习惯。
2）能运用一些相关资料对他人进行好习惯与坏习惯的调查。
2. 教学难点：
能运所给的提示词来描写个人的饮食起居等方面的习惯。
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision
1. Have a dictation of the new words and expressions.
2. Let some Ss read the passage in 2b.
3. Check the homework.
Ⅱ. Presentation
1. Show some pictures of your daily activities. Tell Ss your good activities and bad activities.
2. Let some Ss tell about how often they do some activities and judge they are good habits and bad habits.
Ⅲ. Practice
1. Look at the information in the chart and complete the report.
2. 阅读指导 :
首先，通读短文，了解短文的大体意思。读表格中活动及后面的做此活动所用的时间，并确定做此
事的频率， 可以在每个活动后面写出相应的频率词。 如：Exercise 应用 always/every day ；read books 也
是 always/every day ；drink juice 应为 usually; ⋯
3. Ss read the passage then fill in the blanks with the words in the box.
4. Check the answers.
Ⅳ. Writing
Work on 3b:
1. Complete the chart with your own information. Then in the last column, use expressions like always, every
day, twice a week and never.
2. Then let some Ss show their chart to the class.
Work on 3c:
1. Let Ss write a report about their good habits and bad habits. Say how often they do things using the report
in 3a as an example.
2. 写作指导：
首先，根据自己所填写的表格，写出相关的自己的好习惯及坏习惯的句子。然后，按先叙述好习
惯，再叙述坏习惯。将这些句子排列在一起。注意，连接词的运用，如： however, also 等。让句子更加
简洁和流畅。
3. Check the compositions and let some Ss read their compositions.
Ⅴ. quiz
1. Tell Ss to take the health quiz. Compare your results with your partner ’ s. Who ’s healthier?
2. Read the quiz and the chart first and make sure all the students know how to take the health quiz.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
21
3. Work in groups and take the quiz in your group. See who is healthier?
Ⅵ. Practice
Self Check 1 and 2
1. 让学生相互讨论并在表格中填写出自己及自己的父母亲所做的活动。
2. Let some Ss read aloud their chart. Then try to write five sentences using the information above.
3. Make sure they use the correct forms of the verbs.
Self check 3
1. Tell Ss that they should read the conversation and then fill in the blanks with the right forms.
2. Ss read the conversations and try to fill in the blanks.
3. Check the answers:
usually, How often, Hardly, How often, once a; never
4. Let Ss practice the conversation with their partner.
Homework
1. Review Section B.
2. Wri te a short passage your father or mother ’ s good habits or bad habits.
板书设计：
◇总第 9 课时
Unit 3 I ’ m more outgoing than my sister.
Section A 1 (1a-2d)
一、 教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 能掌握以下单词： outgoing, better, loudly, quietly, hard-working, competition, fantastic, which, clearly,
win
能掌握以下句型：
① Tina is taller than Tara.
Section B 2 3a-Self Check
3a: every day; usually, hardly ever, always, sometimes, hardly ever, never
3b: exercise often, read books every day, drink juice usually, never stay up late
Eat hamburgers sometimes, always watch TV for two hours, hardly ever help with
housework
3c: One possible version:
I have lots of good habits. I exercise every day. I always read books. I eat fruit
every day. I drink milk twice a week. I never stay up late. But I have some bad habits,
too. I always watch TV for two hours a day. I use the Internet twice a week. I hardly ever
help with housework. I never go to the dentist.
Self check 3:
usually, how often, hardly, how often, twice a; never
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
22
② Sam has longer hair than Tom.
③ She also sings more loudly than Tara.
2) 能掌握以下语法：
① 形容词或副词比较级形式的构成。
② 表示两者进行比较的句式结构。
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
能对人物的外表进行描绘，个性进行比较。
二、 教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 形容词或副词比较级形式的构成。
2) 表示两者进行比较的句式结构。
2. 教学难点：
He has shorter hair than Sam.
Is Tom smarter than Tim?
She also sings more loudly than Tara.
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Lead-in
1. Ask Ss to write down as many adj. about people as possible. Check the adj. Ss write and we can group
them into some pairs, like: [Section A 1a]
tall --- short; thin --- heavy, long hair --- short hair, calm --- wild ⋯
Give Ss an example by comparing Old Henry and Santa Claus.
e.g. Santa Claus is older than Henry. Henry is taller than Santa Claus.
Henry is younger than Santa Claus. Santa Claus is younger than Henry.
Ⅱ. Presentation
Ask Ss to see the pix about apples and pears to see the differences. Then compare some of their things with
each other.
e.g. The apples are bigger than the pears.
The pears are more delicious than the apples.
Summarize the Comparatives. Group competition.
A + be(V) + 比较级 + than + B.
Ⅲ. Game (I and my desk mate)
Ask Ss to compare with their partners and find out the differences.
e.g. She is heavier than me. I am more outgoing than her.
Ⅳ. Listening
Then listen to the recording. Ask Ss to number the twins.
Check the answers.
Ⅴ. Pair work
Point out the sample conversation in activity 1c.
Say, now work with a partner. Make your own conversation about the twins.
Ask several pairs to say one or more of their conversations.
Ⅵ. Listening
1. Work on 2a:
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
23
Point out the two columns and read the headings: -er, -ier and more. Then point out the words in the box. Read
them.
Say, now listen and write the –er and –ier words in the first column and the words that use more in the second
column.
Play the recording and check the answers.
2. Work on 2b.
Point out the picture and the two boxes with the headings Tina is and Tara is.
Say, listen to the recording. Write word in the boxes. The words are from the list in activity 2a.
Play the recording and check the answers.
Ⅶ. Pair work
1. Point out the chart in activity 2c. Say, Make your own conversations according to the information. Ask pairs
to continue on their own.
2. Ss practice their conversations.
3. Ask some pairs to act out their conversations.
Ⅷ. Role-play
1. Read the conversation first and try to match the people with the right things.
a. sang better
b. with shorter hair
c. practice more and really wanted to win
d. sang more clearly
e. danced better
2. Let Ss read the conversations after the teacher.
3. Let Ss practice the conversation.
4. Then let some pairs act out their conversations in front of the class.
Homework:
Write six sentences: Write about the things that are the same and different between you and your best friend.
板书设计：
◇总第 10 课时
Section A 2 (Grammar focus-3c)
一、 教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 复习巩固形容词的比较形式及对两者进行对比。
2) 进一步总结所学的对两者进行比较的句式结构。
3) 能运用所学的目标语言，进行说与写的活动，完成相关任务。
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
学会与朋友友好相处，培养乐观，积极向上的性格。
Section A (1a-2d)
outgoing, better, loudly, quietly, hard-working,
competition, fantastic, which, clearly, win
句型：
① Tina is taller than Tara.
② Sam has longer hair than Tom.
③ She also sings more loudly than Tara.
Nelly
Lisa
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
24
二、 教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 总结形容词及副词比较级的构成方式。
2) 进一步总结对两者进行比较的句式结构。
2. 教学难点：
1) 总结形容词及副词比较级的构成方式。
2) 能运用所学的目标语言，进行说与写的活动，完成相关任务。
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision
1. Ask some Ss compare he/she with his/her desk mates.
I ’ m taller than my desk mate. But she runs faster than me.
⋯
2. Show some pictures on the big screen. Let some Ss compare the things.
3. Show some adjectives or adverbs. Let Ss add -er, -r or -ier to them.
Ⅱ. Grammar Focus
1. 学生阅读 Grammar Focus 中的句子，然后做填空练习。
(1) 汤姆比萨姆更聪明吗？
Is Tom _______ _____ Sam?
(2) 不是。萨姆比汤姆更聪明。
No, he isn ’ t. Sam is ______ _____ Tom.
(3) 塔拉比蒂娜更外向吗？
Is Tara ____ ________ ______ Tina ？
(4) 不是。蒂娜比塔拉更外向。
No, she isn ’ t. Tina is ______ ________ ___ Tara.
(5) 你和你姐姐一样友善吗？
_____ you _____ friendly _____ your sister?
(6) 不是。我更友善一些。
No, I ’ m not. I ’ m ___________.
(7) 塔拉与蒂娜工作一样努力吗 ?
Does Tara work _____ ______ _____ Tina?
(8) 谁在学校里更努力一些？
Who’ s ______ _____________ at school?
(9) 蒂娜认为她学习比我更努力。
Tina thinks she ______ _______ than me.
3. 学生们完成填空试题后，可以打开课本检查答案，对错误的句子，单独进行强化记忆。
Ⅲ. Try to Find
总结：
两者进行比较 , 表示 “一方比另一方更 ⋯⋯”的句型：
1. A + be + 形容词比较级 + than + B
2. A + 实义动词 + 副词比较级 + than + B
两者进行比较 , 表示 “一方与另一方一样 ⋯⋯”的句型：
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
25
1. A + be + as 形容词原形 + as + B
2. A + 实义动词 + as 副词原形 + as + B
Ⅳ. Practice
Work on 3a:
1. 读下列句子，根据提示词完成一般疑问句，并做回答。
2. 看所给的第一例句，让一名学生读例句，确定所有的学生都明白本题的做法。
方法指导：应通读所给的提示词，掌握句子大意；然后，确定进行对比的双方及所给的形容词，根
据上一环节中所总结的句式结构来组成正确的一般疑问句。最后，再根据回答，来确定答语中空格中
单词的意思，并用正确的比较级形式。
3. 学生们按老师指导的方法进行阅读，并逐句推敲每空应填什么词，在实际的运用提高自己的阅读能
力、分析能力及综合运用能力。
4. 最后，教师与同学们一起校对答案，并对学生们有疑问的地方进行解释。
Work on 3b:
1. Ask Ss to think of himself/herself two years ago. Write about how they are different now.
2. Give an example:
T: S1, Are you taller now?
S1: Yes, I am. I ’ m taller than I was two years ago.
T: Pay attention to the tense. “ I was two years ago. ”
3. Ss work by themselves. Read the sentences in 3b and write the other four sentences.
4. Check the answers with the class.
Ⅴ. Group work
1. Tell Ss to read the chart first in 3c. Make sure they know the meaning of the words in the chart.
2. Ask one student the question:
T: Who is smarter, your mother or your father ？
S1: I think my mother is smarter than my father.
3. Ss read the chart and check √ in the chart.
4. Work in groups. Ask and answer the questions with their partners.
5. Try to make a report.
(最后，可以经学生们评议来推举最有能力的小组）
Ⅵ. Exercises
If time is enough, do some more exercises on big screen.
用所给单元的正确形式填空。
1. My hai r is _____ (long) than my sister ’ s.
2. I am ______(tall) than you.
3. She is _____ ______(outgoing) than me.
4. Lily is _____ (heavy) than Lucy. And Lucy is _____ (thin) than Lily.
5. I have _____ (short) hair than Tina.
6. Tom is ______ ___________ (hard-working) than Tim.
Homework
1. Review the grammar focus after class.
2. Write down the same and different between you and a friend.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
26
板书设计
◇总第 11 课时
Section B 1 1a-2e
一、 教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 能掌握以下单词： talented, truly, care, care about, serious, mirror, kid, as long as, necessary, be different
from, both, though, bring out, grade, should, the same as, saying, reach, hand, touch, heart, fact, in fact
2) 能掌握以下句型：
① I think a good friend makes me laugh.
② For me, a good friend likes to do the same things as me.
③ And a good friend is talented in music.
④ You don ’t need a lot of them as they are good.
Section A Grammar Focus-3c
2. Does Jack run faster than Sam?
No, he doesn’t. He runs slower than Sam.
3. Is your cousin more outgoing than you?
No, she isn’t. She’s less outgoing than me.
4. Is Paul funnier than Carol?
No, he isn’t. He’s quieter than Carol.
Who’s smarter, your father or your mother?
I think my mother is smarter than my father.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
27
⑤ Larry is quite different from me.
3) 阅读短文获得正确的信息的能力。
4）阅读短文并能完成相关任务。
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
了解人与人之间的差异性，了解自己对朋友的看法，明确自己需要什么样的朋友。
二、 教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 掌握本课时出现的生词及表达方式。
2) 进行听力训练，提高综合听说能力。
3) 阅读短文，获得相关信息，提高学生们的综合阅读能力。
2. 教学难点
1. 听力训练
2. 阅读 2b 部分的短文并完成相关要求。
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision
1. Daily greeting.
2. Check the homework. Let some Ss report what his/her father and mother are like.
Ⅱ. Presentation
1. Show a maxim to Ss: A friend indeed is a friend in need.
Ask, what kind of things are important in a friend?
Ⅲ. Reading and writing
Work on 1a:
1. Read each description to the class and ask the Ss to repeat.
What kind of things is important in a friend? Rank the things below 1-6 (1 is most important)
Ask different Ss to copy the six phrases on the Bb. Then read the phrases together.
2. Read each description loudly. In your opinion, which one is the most important? Please rank the things
(1-6). You put a 1 after the thing that is most important to you, and put a 2 after the second most important
thing and so forth . Now let ’ s check which things are most important to you.
Work on 1b:
1. Well, every one of you has his own idea. Now please talk about what you think a good friend should be like
in groups of four. First read the example dialogue, and then make your dialogue about friends using the
phrases in activity 1a.
2. Ss try to write their own sentences.
Ⅳ. Listening
1. Next you will hear an interviewer talking to Molly and Mary. What are they talking about? When I play the
recording for the first time, you just listen carefully and give me the answer. Have you got it? Yes, they are
talking about their best friends. Now look at the chart, and write the things that Molly and Mary like about
their best friends. You can write only words and phrases. Let ’ s check your answers.
3. T: Now let's work on 1c. Let ’ s listen to the tape again and fill in the rest of the chart in 1c.
4. Ss listen to the tape and fill in the chart.
5. Check the answers:
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
28
听力指导：要抓他们之间的相似之处与不同之处，这两个重点内容。因此在听的时候，应重点将人物
及动作这两个方面的听清，其他作为非重点内容。
Ⅴ. Group work
Work on 1e:
1. Work in groups. Say, now work with your partner. Make a conversation using information in the chart.
Ask several pairs to say their conversations to the class.
2. Teacher can walk around the classroom, and give some help to the Ss.
Work on 2a:
1. Say: Write the comparative forms of the following adjectives. Then use them to write five sentences about
you and your friends.
2. Ss work in a group. Check each o ther ’ s answers.
3. Let some Ss read their sentences.
Ⅵ. Reading
Quickly reading
1. T: Let's meet three new friends, Jeff Green, Huang Lei and Mary Smith. What are they like? What do they
think of their friends? Now read the passages Underline the differences between the friends and circle the
similarities.
2. Let some Ss read the passage quickly and underline the differences and circle the similarities. Then let
another Ss read aloud these sentences.
3. Check the answers with the Ss.
Careful reading
1. Let Ss read the sentences in 2c. Make sure they know the meaning of these sentences.
2. Let Ss read the passages again and judge these sentences are True or False.
3. Ss read and find the answers to the questions.
4. Check the answers.
⋯
Ⅶ. Writing
1. T: Now let ’ s think of you and your friends. How do you and your friends compare with the people in the
article? Write five sentences.
2. 方法指导：首先，应思考一下自己及自己朋友的特点；然后，认真与短文所提及的人物进行对比。
写出明确的比较句。注意运用正确的比较句：
句型指导：
A + be different from B because + 两者比较句
A + be similar to B because + 两者比较句
3. Ss try to write their sentences.
4. Let some Ss read aloud their sentences to the class.
Ⅷ. Talking
1. T: Read these saying about friends. Can you translate them into Chinese.
2. Let some Ss translate the sentences into Chinese.
3. Tell Ss: Which saying is their favorite? Which friend do you think about when you read this saying? Why?
Tell your partner about it.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
29
4. Give the Ss an example. Ss think about it and try to tell something to their partner.
5. Let some Ss talk about it.
Homework
1、Read the passages after class.
2、Make sentences with the phrase below:
as long as ; be different from; bring out
be similar to; in fact; make sb. Do ⋯
It ’ s (not) necessary to do ⋯
板书设计：
◇总第 12 课时
Section B 2 3a-Self check
一、 教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 掌握下列词汇： primary, primary school, information
2) 复习如何对两者进行比较。能够综合运用所学的知识来对两个事物或人物进行对比。
3) 总结回顾形容词或副词的比较级形式，并通过不同形式的训练来熟练掌握所学的知识。
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
1) 能了解人与人之间的差异性，能做到相互理解相互学习。
2) 能正确看待自己和他人的优缺点，学人之长，补己之短。
二、 教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
Section B 1a-2e
Sentence structure:
① I think a good friend makes me laugh.
② For me, a good friend likes to do the same things as me.
③ And a good friend is talented in music.
④ You don’t need a lot of them as they are good.
⑤ Larry is quite different from me.
Main phrase:
as long as ; be different from; bring out
be similar to; in fact; make sb. do ⋯
be good at; be talented in; care about ⋯
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
30
1) 能运用所学的知识对事物或人物进行对比。
2) 能正确运用形容词或副词的比较级形式。
2. 教学难点：
能根据提示信息，对两个人物或事物进行对比。
复习运用形容词或副词的比较级形式。
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision
1. Have a dictation of the new words and expressions.
2. Let some Ss read their passages to the class.
3. Ask some Ss to compare themselves and their friends.
Ⅱ. Presentation
1. Show some pictures of the students of your class. Describe the Ss.
She is tall/short. She is popular/serious/hardworking. → be + 形容词
She has long straight hair/ short straight hair. → have/has ⋯ hair
She likes reading/sports ⋯→ likes ⋯
2. Let some Ss describe the student in the big screen.
Ⅲ. Writing
1. T: Wang Lingling and Liu Lili are best friends. Look at the chart below and compare them.
2. 写作指导：
阅读表格中的描述；分析描述词的特点；是用形容词还是用动词进行描述；根据在导入总结的句式结
构来对学生们进行描述。相似的地方，可以用 both 来共同表达出来；不同的地方，可以用比较的句式
表达出来。
3. Ss try to write these sentences.
4. Check the answers.
Ⅳ. Writing
Work on 3b:
1. Think of your friends. Make notes about two of your friends. One friend should be similar to you. The other
friend should be different.
2. Give some examples: popular, outgoing, serious, hard-working, tall, thin ⋯ likes reading/sports, art,
music ⋯ has long/short straight hair ⋯
3. Check the answers with each other.
Work on 3c:
Write two paragraphs describing your friends.
写作指导：
首先，找出和你的朋友相似的方面。对这些方面进行描述；可以用 be both ⋯ 或 likes ⋯句式结构
来描述。
其次，对不同之处进行描述。根据在 3b 中所做的记录，用形容词或副词的比较级形式，用正确的
句式进行两人之间的对比。如：
A is more outgoing than B. B works harder than A. ⋯
4. Show some Ss ’ compositions on the big screen. Correct the mistakes in the composition.
Ⅴ. Practice
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
31
1. Ask the questions about the ad.
① What do the English Study Center need?
② Should the student be outgoing?
2. Let Ss read the ad and answer the questions.
3. Let Ss think about what the student like?
Give Ss some examples:
He/She should be outgoing. He/She should be good with children. He/She should be good at English ⋯
4. Tell Ss to compare two of their classmates. They can use the real names.
5. Ss talk with their partners and compare two of their classmates.
Ⅵ. Self Check
Work on Self Check 1
1. Look at the chart. Let one student read the words in the box first.
2. Tell Ss to put the words in the correct columns in the chart. Make they know they should put some
adjectives in the first column. In the second col umn, they should put some “ verbs + 副词 ”。
3. Ss work by themselves and then check the answers with the Ss.
Work on Self check 2
1. Tell Ss to fill in the blanks using the correct forms of the words in the brackets.
2. 提示： 注意看句子的意思及有无表示比较的介词 than 来确定是否是用比较级的形式。
3. Ss work by themselves and fill in the blanks.
4. Check the answers with the Ss.
Work on Self check 2
1. Have a writing test. Ss think of their best friend. Write down two ways in which they are similar, and two
ways in which they are different. Make sure to use comparatives.
2. Ss write the sentences quickly and see who writes best.
3. Encourage some Ss to work harder.
Homework
1. Review Section B.
2. Write about six sentences about their parents. Compare them.
板书设计：
Section B 3a-Self Check
3a: One possible version:
Wang has long straight hair, Liu has short straight hair. Wang Lingling likes
reading, but Liu Lili likes sports. They are both popular in class. They ’re both
outgoing. Wang Lingling is serious. Liu Lili is funnier than Wang Lingling.
Wang is more hard-working than Liu, but Liu is smart.
3c: One possible version:
My friend A is quite similar to me. We are both tall and thin. We are both quiet
and serious. We like reading together. We are hard-working in class, so we
often get good grades. My friend B is different from me. She ’s funnier and
more outgoing than me. She always speaks loudly. She is good at soccer. She ’s
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
32
◇总第 13 课时
Unit 4 What ’ s the best movie theater?
Section A 1 (1a-2d)
一、 教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 能掌握以下单词： theater, comfortable, seat, screen, close, ticket, worst, cheaply, song, DJ, choose,
carefully, reporter, so far, fresh, comfortably, No problem
能掌握以下句型：
① It has the biggest screens.
② It ’s the most popular.
③ Which is the best clothes store?
④ You can buy clothes the most cheaply there.
⑤ They play the most boring songs.
2) 能了解以下语法：
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
33
掌握形容词及副词的最高级形式；用最高级形式来描述人或物的特殊。
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
了解我们周围中有那些最出色的人或物， 知道生活中有很多值得我们去学习的人。 周围环境中有很
多值得我们去珍惜的事物。
二、 教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 形容词及副词最高级形式的构成。
2) 用形容词或副词的最高级形式来描述人或事物。
2. 教学难点：
用形容词或副词的最高级形式来描述人或事物。
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Lead-in
1. 向学生们介绍一座大家都很熟悉的电影院，谈论自己对这座建筑物的感受。从而引出本课时中的一
些重要单词： comfortable seats, big screens, best sound, cheap, new movies, close to home, buy tickets
quickly, popular ⋯
2. 学生们听老师的介绍，并学习这些新生词。
3. 学生们看幻灯片，并学习记忆这些生词。
Ⅱ. Presentation
Learn the new words.
Ⅲ. Discussion
1. How do you choose which movie theater to go to? Write the things in the box under “ Important ” or
“ Unimportant ”.
2. Ss discuss with their partners and write the words in the box in the chart.
Ⅳ. Listening
1. T: Tell Ss to read the sentences in the chart. Make sure they know the meaning of the sentences.
2. Play the recording for the Ss to listen and match the statement with the right movie theaters.
3. Play the recording again. Check the answers with the Ss.
Ⅴ. Pair work
1. Let Ss read the model with a partner.
2. Use the information in the chart of 1b. Ask and answer with a partner.
3. Let some pairs ask and answer about the chart.
Ⅵ. Listening
Work on 2a:
1. Read the questions and answers in 2a. Tell Ss to remember the information.
2. Play the recording for the Ss to listen and circle the boy ’ s answers.
3. Play the recording again to check the answers.
Work on 2b:
1. Let Ss read the sentences below. Explain some main sentences for the Ss. Make sure they know what to do.
2. Play the recording for the Ss to write the correct store or radio station next to each statement.
3. Play the recording again to check the answers.
Ⅶ. Pair work
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
34
1. Tell Ss Student A is the reporter. Student B is the boy. Role-play the conversation.
2. Let Ss read conversation after the teacher.
3. Explain some main points for the Ss.
4. Ss act the conversation in pairs. Ask some pairs to act out their conversations.
Ⅷ. Role-play
1. Read the conversations and answer the two questions:
① What is the newest cinema? __________________________________
② How does Helen like it? ____________________________________
2. Explain some new words and main points in the conversation.
3. Read the conversation after the teacher.
4. Practice the conversation with their partner. Then let some pairs to act out the conversation.
Homework:
写六个句子来说一下你们班的 “最⋯⋯”。
In my class, Lin Tao is the tallest.
1. In m y class, ⋯
板书设计：
◇总第 14 课时
Section A 2 (Grammar focus-3c)
一、 教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 学习掌握下列词汇： worse, service, pretty, menu, act
2）进行一步复习巩固学习 Section A 部分所学的生词和词组。
3）对形容词及副词的最高级形式的构成进行总结，掌握其构成规则。
4) 总结用形容词及形容词的最高级形式来描述人物或事物的句型结构。
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
了解我们周围中有那些最出色的人或物， 知道生活中有很多值得我们去学习的人。 周围环境中有
很多值得我们去珍惜的事物。
二、 教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 复习巩固 Section A 部分所学的生词和词组，达到熟练运用的目标。
2) 掌握和运用形容词和副词的最高级形式来描述人物或事物。
2. 教学难点：
Section A 1 (1a-2d)
theater, comfortable, seat, screen, close, ticket, worst, cheaply, song,
DJ, choose, carefully, reporter, so far, fresh, comfortably, No problem
Sentences Structures：
① It has the biggest screens.
② It’s the most popular.
③ Which is the best clothes store?
④ You can buy clothes the most cheaply there.
⑤ They play the most boring songs.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
35
1) 掌握一些特殊形容词或副词的最高级形式。
2) 运用形容词和副词的最高级形式来描述人物或事物。
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Lead-in
回答下列问题：
In our class, who is the funniest student?
In our class, who is the most serious student?
In our class, who is the tallest student?
In all the subjects, which is the most interesting subject?
In all the subjects, which is the most difficult subject?
1. Who ’ s the tallest in your class?
2. Which is the worst clothes store?
3. Which is the best clothes store?
4. Which radio station plays the most boring songs?
5. Which radio station plays the best songs?
6. Which cinema has the most comfortable seats?
Ⅱ. Grammar Focus
1. 学生阅读 Grammar Focus 中的句子，然后做填空练习。
① 哪是可以去的最好的电影院？
What is the ____ ______ _____ to go to?
② 城镇剧院，它离家最近。
Town Cinema. It ’ s the ______ ___ home.
③ 并且你能在那里最快地买到票。
And you can buy ______ the _______ ________ there.
④ 哪家是镇上最差的服装店？
_______ is the ______ clothes store in town?
⑤ 梦想服装店。它比蓝月亮差一些。
Dream Clothes. It ’ s ______ ____ Blue Moon。
⑥ 它的服务最差。
It has ______ _______ _________.
⑦ 你认为 970 AM 怎么样？
What do you _______ _____ 970 AM?
⑧ 我认为 970AM 十分差，它放最差的音乐。
I think 970 AM is _______ _______. It has the ______ ________.
2. 学生们根据记忆，看大屏幕来完成填空练习。
3. 学生们完成填空试题后，可以打开课本检查答案，对错误的句子，单独进行强化记忆。
Ⅲ. Try to Find
一、形容词和副词的最高级形式的构成：
1. 学生们观察例词，发现他们的规则，与同学们讨论，并记下来。
2. 最后，由各小组长来说一说他们小组所做的总结。
3. 大屏幕出示形容词和副词的最高级形式的规则，学生们记忆或记在笔记本上。
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
36
二、用最高级来描述人物或事物的句型小结：
1. A + be + the 形容词最高级 + 表示范围的介词词组
2. A + 动词 + (the) 副词最高级 +（表示范围的介词词组）
例句：
Dream Clothes is the worst in town.
The DJs choose songs the most carefully.
Ⅳ. Practice
Work on 3a:
1. Tell Ss to read the sentences in 3a and try to fill in the blanks with correct forms of the words in brackets.
2. 方法指导：应通读全句，掌握短文大意；然后，根据句意及句子中有没有表示范围的词组，来确定
空格处的形容词或副词是用何级别形式。比如，在第一题中，句末有表示范围的词组 in town ，可知空
格处应填 bad 的最高级形式，故应填 worst。其他类似。
3. 学生们，按老师指导的方法进行阅读，并逐句推敲每空应填什么词，在实际的运用提高自己的阅读
能力、分析能力及综合运用能力。
4. 最后，教师与同学们一起校对答案，并对学生们有疑问的地方进行解释。
Work on 3b:
1. 让学生们阅读表格中词语，并记忆这些词语的形式。
2. 让学生们思考一下他们居住地周围的一些商店的情况，并填写在表格中。
3. 让学生们就表格中所填写的内容， 来发表自己谈论自己居住地周围的情况， 并写在表格中。 相互检
查一下自己所写的句子，发现并改正错误。
4. 让部分学生读一下自己的句子。大家一起改正句子中的错误。
Ⅴ. Group work
1. 让一名学生读表格中的内容。并告诉学生们本学习活动的要求。
2. 学生们与自己的小组成员一起来讨论自己居住地周围的饭店的情况， 并将名字及情况填写在表格中。
3. 讨论并比较这些饭店的情况，每个成员发表自己的意见，讨论自己认为是最好的饭店。
4. 选举一名学生来向同学们汇报自己小组的讨论情况。
(最后，可以经学生们评议来推举最有能力的小组）
Ⅵ. Exercises
If time is enough, do some more exercises on big screen.
用所给单词的适当形式填空：
1. Lily is ______ (early) than Lucy.
2. Who goes __________ (slowly), Tom or Jim?
3. This book is _______________ (interesting) than that one.
4. She is ____________ (careful) in her school.
5. Who is _________ (late) Jim, Tom or Jack?
6. I think beef noodles is ________________ (delicious) of all.
Homework
谈论一下自己班级的 “班级之最 ” Who’s the tallest? (the smartest, the tallest, the heaviest, the friendliest, the
thinnest, the most beautiful, the busiest, the funniest, the most popular ⋯)
I think ⋯ is the tallest.
板书设计
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
37
◇总第 15 课时
Section B 1 1a-2e
一、 教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 能掌握以下单词： creative, performer, talent, common, all kinds of, beautifully, role, winner, prize,
everybody, make up, example, for example, poor, seriously, give
2) 能掌握以下句型：
① Who was the best performer ？
② All these shoes have one thing in common.
③ That ’s up to you to decide.
④ But if you don ’t take these shows too seriously, ⋯
⑤ They usually play a role in deciding the winner.
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
了解一些选秀节目的实质及目的，正确对待生活中的一些歌星及影星，不要盲目地追风，做追星族。
二、 教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 掌握本课时出现的生词及表达方式。
2) 进行听力训练，提高综合听说能力。
Section A 2 Grammar focus-3c
3a: worse, the worst; better, the best; more expensive, the most
expensive; most comfortably; the most interesting
3b: New World has the best service in town.
Big Mouth has best food.
Red Tea House has the best service.
3c: Danny’s is the best one because it’s the closest to my home.
Blue Moon is the best one because it has the most delicious food.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
38
3）阅读短文，获得相关信息，提高学生们的综合阅读能力。
2. 教学难点
1). 听力训练
2). 阅读 2b 部分的短文并完成相关要求。
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision
1. Daily greeting.
2. 复习形容词和副词最高级形式的构成规则，并完成相关任务。
3. Check the homework. Let some Ss report “ Who’ s the ⋯ in class? ”
Ⅱ. Presentation
1. T: Show some movie theater or restaurant in the neighborhood on the big screen. Tell Ss your thoughts
about them.
2. Talk about the clothes stores or food stores in your neighborhood.
e.g.
Blue Moons has the worst clothes. New Fashion has the best quality. Young House has the cheapest clothes.
Jenny ’ s has the best service.
Ⅲ. Game
1. Work with your partners. You say an adjective and your partner say its opposites in the chart.
2. Ss work in pairs and see who can do better.
3. Work on 1a and write these words and phrases next to their opposites in the chart.
4. Check the answers with the Ss.
Ⅳ. Listening
Work on 1c:
1. Tell Ss to look at the pictures and the names in 1c. Tell Ss this school had a talent show last weekend. Some
Ss and some teachers took part in the talent show. Now listen to the conversation and math the pictures with
the performers.
2. Play the recording for the Ss. Ss just listen for the first time. Play the recording again and match the pictures
with the performers.
3. Check the answers:
Work on 1d:
1. T: Now please look at the chart in 1e. What do the people say about the performers? You'll listen to the
tape again. Then try to fill in the blanks.
听力指导：要抓别人对他们每个人的评价所说的词汇，也就是那些表示评价的形容词或副词的最高级
形式。因此在听的时候，应重点放在对人物的表演进行评价的最高级形式上。
2. Ss listen to the recording carefully and try to fill in the blanks.
3. Play the recording again and check the answers with the class.
Ⅴ. Group work
1. Work in groups. Look at the information in 1d and make a conversation with your partner.
2. Make a model for the Ss.
3. Tell Ss to make a conversation about all the performers.
4. Teacher can walk around the classroom, and give some help to the Ss.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
39
Ⅵ. Reading
1. T: Do you often watch TV? Do you like China ’ s Got Talent? Today we’ ll learn a passage about talent
shows.
2. Let Ss read the passage quickly and find out “ Which three talent shows are mentioned? ”
3. Ss read the passage quickly and find the answers to the questions.
Ⅶ. Reading
1. T: Now let ’ s work on 2c. First, let ’ s read the questions and make sure we know the meanings of all the
questions. Then read the passage again and find the answers to the questions.
2. 方法指导：首先，应读懂五个题目的意思；然后，带着这五个问题再次认真阅读短文的内容，并在
短文中找出相关问题的回答依据。 综合短文内容与题目内容，确定最为贴切的答案。
3. Ss read carefully and try to find the answers to the questions.
4. Check the answers with the class.
Ⅷ. Reading
1. T: Read the passage again. This time you should underline all the superlatives in the passage, then write
sentences using at least four of them.
2. 方法指导：首先，在短文中划出形容词或副词的最高级形式；然后，结合自己生活或班级中的人或
事物来用这个词语来造一个自己的句子；最后，与同位交换自己的句子，互相检查一下。
3. Ss find the superlatives in the passage. Try to write their sentences.
Homework
1. 课后阅读短文，试着复述课文，总结课文出现的重难点词组及表达方式。
2. 完成 2e 中的调查，并写出一个调查报告。
板书设计：
Section B 1 1a-2e
New words: creative, performer, talent, common, all kinds of, beautifully, role,
winner, prize, everybody, make up, example, for example, poor, seriously, give
Sentence Structures:
① Who was the best performer？
② All these shoes have one thing in common.
③ That’s up to you to decide.
④ But if your don’t take these shows too seriously, ⋯
⑤ They usually play a role in deciding the winner.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
40
◇总第 16 课时
Section B 2 3a-Self check
一、 教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 复习形容词及副词的比较的构成规则。掌握生词 crowded。
2) 能够综合运用所掌握的知识来描述周围的地点及事物的特点。
3) 通过描述周围的地点及事物来综合运用所学的形容词及副词的比较的用法。
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
1) 每个人都有自身的特长、优点和特点，古人云：三人行必有我师焉。每个人都可以从他人那儿学习
到你所需要的可贵的品质和精神。
2）文中的选材贴近学生日常生活，易激发学生的学习兴趣。
二、 教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 能运用所学的形容词或副词的最高级的用法，根据提示来完成选词填空的任务。
2）能运用所学的形容词或副词的最高级的用法来描写自己周围的一些地点和事物等。
2. 教学难点：
能运用所学的形容词或副词的最高级的用法来描写自己周围的一些地点和事物等。
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision
1. Have a dictation of the new words and expressions.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
41
2. Who’ s got the talent in your class? Let some Ss give their report.
e.g.
1) Li Fei is the best chess player.
2) Xu Li is the most talented dancer.
3) Wu Fan is the most interesting writer.
4) Sun Nan is the faster runner.
5) ⋯ is the best basketball player.
6) ⋯ is the best English speaker.
7) ⋯ is the funniest actor.
3. Review the phrases. And make a sentence with the phrases.
1) 有相同特征 _________________
2) 各种各样的 _________________
3) 由 ⋯⋯ 决定 _________________
4) 发挥作用 ___________________
5) 编造 ________________
6) 例如 ________________
7) 认真对待 _____________
8) 给某人某物 ___________
Ⅱ. Lead-in
1. Let Ss talk about “ What’ s your favorite place to go on weekends? Why is it? ”
e.g.
1) The Children ’ s Center is the best place to go on weekends. Because I can play
tennis and play ping-pong. I can speak English with friends.
2) The best place to go is Center Park. Because I can swim and climb the hill. I can
fly kites and take a walk in the woods.
Ⅲ. Reading
1. Read the article about Greenwood Park. Fill in the blanks with the correct superlative forms of the
adjectives and adverbs in the box.
2. 写作指导：
首先，阅读短文，整体把握短文大意。
其次，分析有空格的每个句子，看空格处应是形容词还是副词，根据句意确定单词。
最后，将单词的最高级形式填到空白处。副词前可以不加 the。
3. Ss try to read the article and try to fill in the blanks.
4. Check the answers with the Ss.
Ⅳ. Writing
Work on 3b:
1. Think about some of the best places/things in your town. Why are they the best?
2. Give some examples to the Ss.
best middle school: No. 1 Middle School;
Why: Because it is the most beautiful school in my town.
Best super-market: New Century Supermarket
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
42
Why: the best quality and the best service
⋯
3. Ss try to think it and think about the reasons.
4. Try to fill in the blanks.
Work on 3c:
1. Write about your town and the best places/things there.
2. 写作指导：
本文为写自己所居住的城镇上最好的地方或事物，并说明原因。
因此，时态应用一般现在时态；
应先描述最 ⋯⋯ 的是某个地方，然后说明这个地方最好的原因。
应注意正确运用形容词或副词的最高级形式来表达。
3. 学生们根据写作提示，及上面表格中的提示来写作这篇文章。
4. Let some Ss read their passage to the class.
Ⅴ. Discussion
1. Discuss the towns/cities in China with a partner. Tell the class which town/city you think is the best.
2. Give Ss some examples:
I think Hangzhou is the best city in China. Because it ’ s the most beautiful. West Lake is the most famous
place. And it ’ s the most popular city. Quite a lot of visitors come to Hangzhou every year.
3. Ss discuss with their partners and try to give their own idea.
4. Try to write about their ideas on a piece of paper.
Ⅵ. Self check
Work on Self check 1:
1. Fill in the blanks with the superlative forms of the words in the box.
2. 方法指导：首先，阅读句子理解大意。确定空格是修饰名词还是修饰动词，从而确定空白处是形容
词还是副词。最后填上其恰当的最高级形式。
3. 指导： 1. the cheapest 空格后有名词 restaurant; 关键句 “你可以花仅五元就能买到一大盘饺子。 ”
⋯
4. 学生做每个试题，并校对答案。
Work on Self check 2
1. Tell Ss to read the information then correct the mistakes.
2. Ss work by themselves.
说明原因： 在短文第一段中列举了这三家影剧院的票价： Town Cinema 12 美元； Screen City10.50 美元；
Movie World 10 美元。
3. 学生们完成试题并说明原因。
Homework
1. Review Section B.
2. Imagine you going to a talent show of famous people. Write an article about the talent show.
板书设计：
Section B 2 3a-Self Check
3a：the best; the fastest; the most crowded; the most creative
3c: one possible version:
The best school is No. 1 Middle School because it is the most beautiful. The
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
43
◇总第 17 课时
Unit 5 Do you want to watch a game show?
Section A 1 (1a-2d)
一、 教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 能掌握以下单词： sitcom, news, soap, educational, plan, hope, find out, discussion, stand, happen, may,
expect
能掌握以下句型：
① What do you want to watch?
② What do you think of talk shows?
③ I can ’t stand them.
④ I don ’t mind them.
⑤ I like/love them. / I don ’t like them.
2) 能了解以下语法：
动词不定式结构做动词的宾语；后面接动词不定式做宾语的动词。
3）学会陈述自己的看法；学会谈论自己的喜好。
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
学会谈论流行文化，了解各类电视和电视节目的名称和自己的喜欢。 注意引导学生们形成正确的
文化观念，大力培养学生们的跨文化意义，形成自己独立的个性。
二、 教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 学习掌握各类电视和电视节目的名称。
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
44
2) 掌握动词不定式结构做动词的宾语；了解后面接动词不定式做宾语的动词。
2. 教学难点：
掌握动词不定式结构做动词的宾语；了解后面接动词不定式做宾语的动词。
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Lead-in
学生们根据图片提示学习各类电视节目并且练习运用 What do you think of ⋯?
Ⅱ. New words
Learn the names of the TV shows.
Ⅲ. Game
1. 引导学生们看 1a 中的图片，根据提示依次说出每一部 TV Show 的名称。
2. 让学生们看图片及 1a 中的词汇，将图片与正确的词汇相连。
3. Check the answers with the Ss.
Ⅳ. Listening
1. T: Tell Ss to read the shows in the box. Make sure they know the meaning of the shows.
2. Play the recording for the Ss to listen and number the shows1-4.
3. Play the recording again. Check the answers with the Ss.
Ⅴ. Pair work
1. Let Ss look at the pictures in the box. Then explain the meaning of each expression to the Ss.
2. Let Ss read the conversation after the teacher. Then let Ss make their own conversation using the shows and
expressions in the box.
3. Let some pairs ask and answer about the shows.
Ⅵ. Listening
Work on 2a:
1. Read the shows in the box of 2a. Tell Ss to remember the information.
2. Play the recording for the Ss to listen and number the TV shows [1-5].
3. Play the recording again to check the answers.
Work on 2b:
1. Let Ss read the sentences below. Explain some main sentences for the Ss. Make sure they know what to do.
2. Play the recording for the Ss to write the correct words in the blanks.
3. Play the recording again to check the answers.
Ⅶ. Pair work
1. Tell Ss ask and answer questions about the TV shows in 2a. They can use the information that is true for
them.
2. Let Ss read conversation after the teacher.
3. Explain some main points for the Ss.
4. Ss act the conversation in pairs. Ask some pairs to act out their conversations.
Ⅷ. Role-play
1. Read the conversations and match the name with the right shows.
① Grace a. game shows and sports shows
② Sarah b. soap operas
③ Grace ’s classmates c. news and talk shows
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
45
2. Explain some new words and main points in the conversation.
3. Read the conversation after the teacher.
4. Practice the conversation with their partner. Then let some pairs to act out the conversation.
IX. Homework:
用下列词组来造句：
(1) plan to ⋯ (2) hope to ⋯
(3) find out ⋯ (4) can ’ t stand ⋯
(5) sth. happen (6) expect to ⋯
板书设计：
◇总第 18 课时
Section A 2 (Grammar Focus-3c)
一、 教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 学习掌握下列词汇： joke, comedy
2）进行一步复习巩固运用 Section A 部分所学的生词和词组。
3）进一步学习运用所学的知识来陈述自己的看法；学会谈论自己的喜好。
4) 掌握动词不定式结构做动词的宾语这一语法知识；掌握后面接动词不定式做宾语的动词。
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
学会谈论流行文化， 了解各类电视和电视节目的名称和自己的喜欢。 注意引导学生们形成正确的
文化观念，大力培养学生们的跨文化意义，形成自己独立的个性。
二、 教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 进一步学习运用所学的知识来陈述自己的看法；学会谈论自己的喜好。
2) 掌握动词不定式结构做动词的宾语这一语法知识；掌握后面接动词不定式做宾语的动词。
2. 教学难点：
掌握动词不定式结构做动词的宾语这一语法知识；掌握后面接动词不定式做宾语的动词。
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Revision
1. Have a dictation of the new words learned in the last class.
2. Ask and answer questions about the different shows.
What do you think of news?
I can ’ t stand it. / I like it. / I don ’ t mind it. I ⋯
Section A 1 1a-2d
sitcom, news, soap, educational, plan, hope, find out, discussion, stand, happen,
may, expect
Sentences Structures：
① What do you want to watch?
② What do you think of talk shows?
③ I can’t stand them.
④ I don’t mind them.
⑤ I like/love them. / I don ’t like them.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
46
3. Role-play the conversation in 2d.
Ⅱ. Grammar focus
1. 学生阅读 Grammar Focus 中的句子，然后做填空练习。
① 你想看新闻吗？
Do you want to ____ ______ _____?
② 你觉得谈话节目怎么样？
What do you ______ ___ _____ shows?
③ 我不介意看。 /我不能忍受。 / 我喜欢看。
I don ’ t ______ them. I ____ ______ them. I ____ ________ them.
④ 你计划今晚上看什么节目？
_______ do you______ _____watch tonight?
⑤ 我计划看《我们过去的时代》 。
I ______ ____ watch Days of Our Past .
⑥ 你期望从情景喜剧中学到什么？
What can you ______ ___ ____ from sitcoms?
⑦ 你能学到一些很好的笑话。
You can _______ some great _____.
⑧ 你为什么喜欢看新闻呢？
Why do you like _________ ___ ______?
⑨ 因为我希望查明在世界各地发了什么事情？
Because I ______ ____ _____ ___ what ’ s going ________ the world.
2. 学生们根据记忆，看大屏幕来完成填空练习。
3. 学生们完成填空试题后，可以打开课本检查答案，对错误的句子，单独进行强化记忆。
Ⅲ. Grammar
动词不定式做宾语的用法：
动词不定式的形式： to + 动词原形
Jack wants to buy some flowers for Mr. Wu.
杰克想给吴老师买些花。
常见的跟动词不定式做宾语的动词 :
想要 want, 期望 expect, 希望 hope, 计划 plan, 决定 decide ,开始 begin,开始 start
2. 最后，由各小组长来说一说他们小组所做的总结。
3. 大屏幕出示常见的跟动词不定式做宾语的动词和同学们一起对答案。
二、【拓展】省略 to 的不定式
有些动词后面跟动词不定式时应将不定式符号 to 省去。常见的动词有 let, make, feel, help, watch, hear
等。例句：
让我来帮助你。 Let me help you.
你能帮助我打扫房间吗？ Can you help me clean the house?
Ⅳ. 及时练
用所给单词的适当形式填空：
1. She expects _________ (arrive) tomorrow.
2. Let ’ s _______ (watch) talk shows tonight.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
47
3. They hope _________ (visit) the Great Wall next year.
4. Do you plan _______ (find) a part-time job?
5. When do you want _____ (go) swimming?
6. My uncle often helps me ________ (learn) math and English.
Ⅴ. New words
joke comedy
Ⅵ. Practice
Work on 3a:
1. Tell Ss to read the conversation in 3a and try to fill in the blanks with right words.
2. 方法指导：应通读整个对话，掌握对话大意；
然后，根据问句所问的内容及自己的实际情况来回答问题。
注意，第二个问是一个选择疑问句，意为 “你想看 ⋯⋯ 还是看 ⋯⋯ 呢？ ”
3. 学生们，按老师指导的方法进行阅读，并逐句推敲每空应填什么词语，在实际的运用提高自己的阅
读能力、分析能力及综合运用能力。
4. 最后，教师与同学们一起校对答案，并对学生们有疑问的地方进行解释。
5. 学生们两结对操练对话，最后找几名学生来表演一下对话。
Work on 3b:
1. 让学生们阅读表格中的问题，明白每个问题的意思。
2. 让学生们思考一下他们自己的实际情况，并做出正确的回答。
3. 让学生们互相检查自己所写的句子，发现并改正错误。
4. 让部分学生就这些问题进行问答，说出自己所写的句子。大家一起改正句子中的错误。
Word on 3c:
1. 让一名学生读表格中的内容。并告诉学生们本学习活动的要求。
2. 先由一名学生们对自己的小组成员进行提问，询问每一名成员希望看的内容。然后，在表格中的适
当位置记下他们的名字。
3. 由其余的同生们根据表格中的情况来写一个小组成员情况的报告。大家互相讨论一下这些报告，最
后，确定出一个最完整且没有错误的报告。
4. 由这名学生来向同学生汇报自己小级的情况。
(最后，可以经学生们评议来推举最有能力的小组）
VII. Exercises
VIII. Writing task
写一个报告，陈述一下你的爸爸、妈妈及祖父母亲分别喜欢看什么类型 节目，并简要说明原因。
My mother like s sitcom. She thinks they ’ re interesting. ⋯
板书设计
Section A 2 Grammar Focus-3c
3a: to watch an action movie; the sports shows; want to watch; a sitcom;
watch the news.
3b: 1. I don’t mind them. 2. I like to watch The Winner.
3. No, I don’t. I think it ’s boring.
4. I expect to find what’s going on around the world.
3c: One possible version:
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
48
◇总第 19 课时
Section B 1 1a-2e
一、 教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 能掌握以下单词： meaningless, action, action movie, cartoon, culture, famous, appear, become, rich,
successful, might, main, reason, film, unlucky, lose, ready, be ready to, character, guy
2) 能掌握以下句型：
① I like to watch action movies because they ’re exciting.
② John wants to watch talk shows because they ’re enjoyable.
③ One of the main reasons is that Mickey was like a common man.
④ However, he was always ready to try his best.
⑤ People today expect to see more than just a little mouse fighting bad guys.
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
了解他人对不同的电影或电视剧的看法，明白不同的人有不同的喜好，从而明确人们喜好的差异
性；了解世界其他国家的文化，形成跨文化的意思。
二、 教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 掌握本课时出现的生词及表达方式。
2) 进行听力训练，提高综合听说能力。
3）阅读短文，获得相关信息，提高学生们的综合阅读能力。
2. 教学难点
1. 听力训练
2. 阅读 2b 部分的短文并完成相关要求。
三、教学过程
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
49
Ⅰ. Revision
看图画让学生们根据图片提示来完成句子，注意动词不定式的用法。
Ⅱ. Lead-in
T: Show some movies or shows on the big screen.
Let Ss discuss about them. Ask and answer what they think of them.
Ⅲ. New words
Present some new words on the big screen.
Ⅳ.Work on 1a
1. Work with your partners. Ask and answer about the movies or shows.
2. Let Ss talk about the movies or shows with the words in 1a.
3. Let some pairs ask and answer in front of the class.
Ⅴ. Listening
Work on 1b:
1. Tell Ss to listen and circle the description words you hear in the box in 1a.
2. Play the recording for the Ss. Ss just listen for the first time. Play the recording again and circle the words.
3. Play the recording and check the answers with the Ss.
Work on 1c:
1. T: Now please look at the chart in 1c. What do John and Mary think of the movies or shows? You'll listen to
the tape again. Then try to fill in the blanks.
听力指导：要抓别人对他们两个人的看法所说的词汇，也就是那些表示看法的形容词。因此在听的
时候，应重点放在对剧目进行评价的形容词上。
2. Ss listen to the recording carefully and try to fill in the blanks.
3. Play the recording again and check the answers with the class.
Ⅵ. Discussion
1. Work in groups. Look at the questions in 2a.
2. Ask one student the questions as a model.
3. Tell Ss to discuss the questions in the group.
Ⅶ. Reading
1. Introduce something about Disney.
2. New words.
3. Work on 2b.
T: Do you like to watch cartoons? Do you know Mickey Mouse? Today we’ ll learn a passage about
Mickey Mouse.
Let Ss read the passage quickly and complete the time line on next page.
Ss read the passage quickly and complete the time line on next page.
Check the answers with the Ss.
4. Work on 2c.
First, let ’ s read the questions in the chart. Make sure all the students know the meaning of the questions. Then
read the passage again and find the answers to the questions.
方法指导：首先，应读懂五个题目的意思；然后，带着这五个问题再次认真阅读短文的内容，并在短
文中找出相关问题的回答依据。 综合短文内容与题目内容，确定最为贴切的答案。
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
50
Ss read carefully and try to find the answers to the questions.
Check the answers with the class.
5. Work on 2d
T: Read the passage again. This time you should discuss the questions with a partner.
方法指导：首先，在短文中找到相关问题的回答依据；然后，与伙伴来讨论一下这个问题，结合自己
生活经历回答出这个问题；
Let some Ss talk about their answers.
VIII. Explanation
IX. Homework
1. Finish 2e on P38.
2. Remember the words and phrases in the lesson.
◇总第 20 课时
Section B 2 (3a-Self Check)
一、 教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 掌握下列生词 : dress up; take sb. ’ s place, army, do a good job
2) 复习 to 不定式做宾语的用法。掌握后面跟不定式结构做宾语的动词。
3) 能够综合运用所掌握的知识来描述自己所喜欢的一些动画片或影视剧。
3) 通过自己所喜欢的一些动画片或影视剧来达到熟练运用所学知识的目的。
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
1) 每个人都有自己的爱好，要了解个体的差异性，了解自己的爱好，尊重别人的爱好。
2) 了解一些影视片的内容，通过观看不同形式的影视片来了解社会，丰富自己的文化知识。
二、 教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 能运用所学的知识及提示来阅读相关影视片的简介，并能完成相关任务。
2）能运用所学的知识与句型表达方式来简介一下自己所看过的影视片。
2. 教学难点：
能运用所学的知识与句型表达方式来简介一下自己所看过的影视片。
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Revision
Review the main phrases learned yesterday.
(1) 想起 __________
(2) 例如 ________
(3) 发行；出版 _________________
(4) 在二十世纪三十年代 ______________
(5) 主要原因之一 ___________________
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
51
(6) 努力做某事 ________________
(7) 愿意迅速做某事 _______________
(8) 尽最大努力 _____________
(9) 不仅仅；不只 ___________
Ⅱ. Lead-in
Ask some questions about Mulan . Let the Ss think and answer the questions:
“ Do you like cartoons? Do you know Mulan ? Can you say anything about it? ”
Ss discuss the questions and answer the questions. e.g.
S1: Yes, I do. Mulan didn ’ t have any brothers. She took his father ’ s place to fight in the army.
S2: Mulan dressed up like a boy. Nobody knew she was a girl in the army.
Ⅲ. New words
Ⅳ. Reading
1. Read the article about Mulan . Fill in the blanks in the movie review. Use the words in the box to help you.
2. 写作指导：
首先，阅读短文，整体把握短文大意。
其次，分析有空格的每个句子，看空格处的意思，联系所给单词的意思，确定空格处应填的单词。
最后，再通读一遍短文，看是否通顺合理。
3. Ss try to read the article and try to fill in the blanks.
4. Check the answers with the Ss.
Ⅴ.Writing
Work on 3b:
1. Think about your favorite movies. Write notes for your own movie review.
2. Give some examples to the Ss.
The name of the movie: The Lion King
The kind of the movie: cartoon
What the movie is about?
Simba ’ s father was the king. But his uncle, Scar killed his father. When Simba grew up, he came back to the
forest and became the true King.
What you think of the movie/star?
It was fantastic.
3. Ss try to think about their favorite movies. Write notes for their own movie review.
4. Try to fill in the blanks.
Work on 3c:
1. Write about your movie review using the notes in 3b.
2. 写作指导：
本文为写自己所喜欢的电影的剧情回顾，
因此，时态应用一般现在时态与一般过去时态；
首先，可介绍影片的类型，及主人公等。
然后，介绍故事的梗概。
最后，表达你对该影片的总体看法。
3. 学生们根据写作提示，及上面表格中的提示来写作这篇文章。
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
52
4. Let some Ss read their passage to the class.
Ⅵ. Discussion
1. Read the kinds of shows or movies in the chart in 4. Ask and answer about them with a partner. Write the
answers in the chart.
2. Give Ss some examples:
S1: What do you think of soap operas?
S2: I think they ’ re boring. What about you?
S1: Well, I don ’ t like them, either.
3. Ss ask and answer with their partners and try to fill in the chart.
4. At last, write a short report about your ideas and your partner ’ s.
VII. Self check
Work on Self check 1:
1. Fill in the blanks with the superlative forms of the words in the box.
2. 本题是根据提示词来进行问答。 问句和答语中没有对人称的提示， 因此应自主确定人称。 可以用 you
来询问，则回答应用 I；如果是用第三人称来询问，则回答也相应的用第三人称来答，如果是第三人
称单数形式还应注意动词用恰当的第三人称单数形式。
具体分析：
如： 1） ─What do you think of soap operas? ─I can ’t mind them.
─ What does your father think of soap operas? ─ He can ’ t mind them.
⋯
4. 学生做每个试题，并校对答案。
Work on Self check 2
1. Tell Ss to read the statements below. Then think about them. Which of the statements they agree. Check ( √ ).
Check ( ×) if they disagree. Give at least one reason.
2. Ss work and by themselves.
说明原因： Give some examples: e.g. I think we can learn some interesting things.
3. 学生们完成试题并说明原因。
VIII. Homework
Write your movie review using the notes in 3b.
板书设计：
Section B 2 3a-Self Check
3a： exciting action; comes from; about; played; like; shows; plan to; want
3b: example: The Lion King cartoon
Simba ’ s father was the king. But his uncle, Scar killed his father. When Simba grew
up, he came back to the forest and became the true King.
It was fantastic.
3c: one possible version:
The Lion King is a cartoon movie. It ’ s the most popular English movie in the world.
The movie is about a young lion, Simba. He was the prince of the forest. But his uncle
Scar wanted to be the king. So he killed Simba ’ s father. When Simba grew up, he came
back to the forest and had a big fight with his uncle. At last, Simba won and became the
true king.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
53
◇总第 21 课时
Unit 6 I ’ m going to study computer science.
Section A1 (1a-2d)
一、教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 能掌握以下单词： grow up, computer programmer, cook, doctor, engineer, violinist, driver, pilot,
pianist, scientist, be sure about, make sure
能掌握以下句型：
① ─What do you want to be when you grow up? ─I want to be a basketball player.
② ─How are you going to do that? ─I ’m going to practice basketball every day.
③ Where are you going to work?
④ When are you going to start?
⑤ I ’m not sure about that.
2) 能了解以下语法：
掌握一般将来时态的构成形式；
3) 用一般将来时态表达将要做的事情。
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
每个人都有自己的梦想和对未来的打算，对于将来想要从事的职业也充满了憧憬。 人们以常谈论
他们的设想，因此，应通过学习这单元的内容来激发学生们的学习主动性和学习兴趣，使他们更加有
理想，并为实现自己的理想而不断努力。
二、教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 学习一般将来时态的构成方式。
2) 学习本课时出现的重点句型，通过在不同情景下运用来熟练运用一般将来时态。
2. 教学难点：用一般将来时态表达自己未来的打算。
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
54
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Lead-in
1. 介绍自己小时候想要从事的职业，由此归纳出以前所学过的一些职业的英语表达方式：
teacher, nurse, doctor, basketball player, runner, actor, actress ⋯
2. 询问学生们想要从事的职业，从而引出句型：
─ What do you want to be when you grow up?
─ I want to be a basketball player.
3. 学生们看幻灯片，引导学生们进行问答自己将来所喜欢的职业。
Ⅱ. Presentation
1. 播放幻灯片，展示一些职业的图片，来引导学生们学习一些新的职业名词：
computer programmer, cook, engineer, violinist, pianist, pilot, scientist, ⋯
2. 让学生们看大屏幕来学习记忆这些生词。
3. Tell Ss to rank them [1-12]. 1 is most interesting, 12 is least interesting.
2. Try to remember the new words.
Ⅲ. Game
1. Show some pictures in the big screen.
2. Let Ss guess what he/she does.
3. Let Ss try their best to guess the job. See which group is the best.
Ⅳ. Listening
1. T: Tell Ss to read the words of jobs in the chart. Make sure they know the meaning of the words and
sentences.
2. Play the recording for the Ss to listen and fill in the blanks.
3. Play the recording again. Check the answers with the Ss.
4. Play the recording again. Ss listen and match the jobs with activities.
5. Show the answers on the big screen.
Ⅴ. Pair work
1. Let Ss read the model with a partner.
2. Use the information in the chart of 1b. Ask and answer with a partner.
3. Let some pairs ask and answer about the chart.
Ⅵ. Listening
Work on 2a:
1. Let Ss look at the pictures below. Explain the activities in the pictures if necessary.
2. Play the recording for the Ss to listen and check ( √ ) the correct boxes in the picture.
3. Play the recording again to check the answers.
Work on 2b:
1. Let Ss read the chart below. Tell Ss that they ’ ll listen to Cheng Han ’ s plan for the future. They should
answer the questions:
“ What” means “ What is Cheng Han want to be? ”
“ Where” means “ where is Cheng Han going to work? ”
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
55
“ How” means “ How is he going to do it? ”
“ When” means “ when is he going to start? ”
2. Play the recording for the Ss to write the correct answers in the chart.
3. Play the recording again to check the answers.
Ⅶ. Pair work
1. Tell Ss to ask and answer about Cheng Han ’ s plans using the information in 2b.
2. Give a model to the Ss.
3. Ss work in pairs. Try to ask and answer about Cheng Han ’ s plans.
4. Ask some pairs to act out their conversations.
Ⅷ. Role-play
1. Read the conversations and answer the two questions:
① What does Ken want to be? __________________________________
② How is he going to do that? __________________________________
③ What does Andy want to be? ____________________________________
2. Explain main points in the conversation.
The Old Man and the Sea by Hemingway. 海明威的《老人与海》 。 此处介词 by 为 “由 ⋯⋯ 所著 ”
之意。 再如： a short story by Lu Xun ( 鲁迅的一部短篇小说 )，the music by Mozart( 莫扎特写的音
乐 )， paintings by Van Gogh(梵高的绘画 )等。
Then you can be anything you want! 那么你就能当上你想做的人了。
此句的基本意思是 you can be anything，不定代词 anything 指代未来所从事的某一职业， you
want 用来修饰 anything 。
3. Let Ss read the conversation after the teacher.
4. Practice the conversation with their partner. Then let some pairs to act out the conversation.
Homework:
1. Recite the conversation in 2d after school.
2. 根据图片提示或自己的实际想法编写一个对话。
--What are you going to be when you grow up?
--I ’ m going to be a/an ⋯
--How are you going to do that?
--I ’ m going to ⋯
板书设计：
Section A1 (1a-2d)
Words: grow up, computer programmer, cook, doctor, engineer, violinist, driver, pilot, pianist, scientist,
be sure about, make sure
Sentence structures:
① ─What do you want to be when you grow up? ─I want to be a basketball player.
② ─How are you going to do that? ─I’m going to practice basketball every day.
③ Where are you going to work?
④ When are you going to start?
⑤ I’m not sure about that.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
56
◇总第 22 课时
Section A2 (Grammar focus-3c)
一、教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 学习掌握下列词汇： college, education, medicine, university, London, article, send
2）进行下一步复习巩固学习 Section A 部分所学的生词和词组。
3）总结一般将来时态的句子结构，并掌握其在不同句式中的句子结构。
4) 能够熟练运用一般将来时态的句子来表达自己未来的打算和做法等情况。
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
每个人都有自己的梦想和对未来的打算， 对于将来想要从事的职业也充满了憧憬。 人们以常谈论他
们的设想，因此，应通过学习这单元的内容来激发学生们的学习主动性和学习兴趣，使他们更加有理
想，并为实现自己的理想而不断努力。
二、教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 复习巩固 Section A 部分所学的生词和词组，达到熟练运用的目标。
2) 能够熟练运用一般将来时态的句子来表达自己未来的打算和做法等情况。
2. 教学难点：
1) 掌握一般将来时态的句子结构，并掌握其在不同句式中的句子结构。
2) 能够熟练运用一般将来时态的句子来表达自己未来的打算和做法等情况。
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision
1. Have a dictation of the new words learned in the last class.
2. Game: Give some riddles on jobs to the Ss. Ss try to guess the job.
3. Ask and answer what they want to be and how they ’ re going to do that.
4. Role-play the conversation in 2d.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
57
Ⅱ. Grammar Focus.
1. 学生阅读 Grammar Focus 中的句子，然后做填空练习。
① 当你长大后，你想做什么？ What do you want ____ ___ When you _____ _____?
② 我想成为一名工程师。 I want to ______ ___ _________.
③ 你打算如何做？ How ______ you _____ to ____that?
④ 我打算努力地学习数学。 I ’m _______ _____ ______ _____ really hard.
⑤ 想去哪里工作？ ______ _______ you going to work?
⑥ 我打算搬往上海。 I ’m ______ _____ ________ to Shanghai.
⑦你打算从什么时候开始？ When ______you _______ to _____?
⑧ 我打算完成中学和大学时开始。 I ’m going to _____ _______I _____ high school and _________.
2. 学生们根据记忆，看大屏幕来完成填空练习。
3. 学生们完成填空试题后，可以打开课本检查答案，对错误的句子，单独进行强化记忆。
Ⅲ. Try to Find
一、一般将来时态：
1. 表示即将发生的事或最近 ____________ 的动作。表示说话者的 ______________
例句：我打算下个月去北京参观。 I ’m going to visit Beijing next year.
她打算长大后，搬往上海。 She’s going to move to Shanghai when I grow up.
练一练：
① 玛丽要卖她的汽车。 Mary is going to sell her car.
② 今天早上我将不吃早餐。 I'm not going to have breakfast this morning.
③ 你打算邀请约翰参加你的聚会吗？ Are you going to invite John to your party?
④ 你打算买什么？ What are you going to buy?
want to be 的用法
Ⅳ. Practice
Work on 3a:
1. Tell Ss to read the sentences in 3a and match what these people want to do with what they are going to do.
2. 方法指导：指导：先读懂这些句子的意思。根据生活常识来进行推测，将职业与相关的活动相连。
比如， 在第一题中， “我朋友相成为一名工程师。 ” 由常识可知答语应是学习数学； 因此应选 e 句 “她打
算学习数学。 ”其他类似。
3.学生们，按老师指导的方法进行阅读，并根据常识来推测应采取什么样的活动。
4. 最后，教师与同学们一起校对答案，并对学生们有疑问的地方进行解释。
Work on 3b:
1. 让学生们阅读对话，整体把握对话的意思。
2. 然后仔细读对话，根据上下文意及时态来确定空格处所应填的词。
3. 和学生们一起校对答案。
4. 让学生们朗读并表演这个对话。
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
58
Ⅴ. Group work
1. 让学生们看表格中的四个特殊疑问词，告诉他们，在这个活动中要求学生们在表格中填写出自己的
理想、实现理想的做法，工作的地点及开始的时间等问题。
2. 学生们与自己的小组成员一起来讨论自己理想、 实现理想的做法， 工作的地点及开始的时间等问题，
同学们根据自己的实际情况，在表格先填写出自己打算成为什么职业的人；打算在哪里工作；打算如
何做；打算什么时候开始。
3. 就上述问题，根据表格的提示，用英语进行讨论。
4. 让几个小组的同学来用英语问题上述四个问题。
(最后，可以经学生们评议来推举最有能力的小组）
Ⅵ. Exercises
If time is enough, do some more exercises on big screen.
重排下列句子，成为一段完整的对话。
A. Are you going to move to Hollywood?
B. Well, I ’ m going to take acting lessons.
C. What are you going to be when you grow up?
D. I ’ m going to finish high school and college first.
E. When are you going to start?
F. I ’ m going to be an actor.
G. And how are you going to become an actor?
H. No, I ’ m going to move to New York.
___, ___, ____, ____, ___, ___, ___, ____
Homework
1. 复习 Grammar focus 中的内容。
2. 用正确的形式填空。
1） We are ____________________ (play) basketball tomorrow.
2）They __________________ (visit) their aunt next week.
3）_____Lucy______________(watch)movie with Lily tomorrow? No, _____ ______.
4）There ___________________________ (be) a football match tomorrow.
5）They ___________________ (not practice guitar) next week.
板书设计
Section A2 Grammar focus-3c
3a: e; h; f; d; a; c; g; b
3b: when; am going; Where; going; What, going; study; When; start
3c: A: What do you want to be when you grow up?
B: I want to be a basketball player.
A: How are you going to do that?
B: I ’m going to take basketball lessons.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
59
◇总第 23 课时
Section B1 1a-2e
一、教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 能掌握以下单词： resolution, team, foreign, able, be able to, question, meaning, discuss, promise,
beginning, write down, physical, themselves, have to do with; self-improvement, take up, hobby, weekly,
schoolwork
2) 能掌握以下句式结构：
① ─What are you going to do next year?
─ I ’ m going to take guitar lessons.
② Many resolutions have to do with self-improvement.
③ They’re going to take up a hobby like painting.
④ Sometimes the resolutions may be too difficult to keep.
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
每个人都有自己的梦想和对未来的打算， 对于将来想要从事的职业也充满了憧憬。 人们以常谈论
他们的设想，因此，应通过学习这单元的内容来激发学生们的学习主动性和学习兴趣，使他们更加有
理想，并为实现自己的理想而不断努力。
二、教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 掌握本课时出现的生词及表达方式。
2) 进行听力训练，提高综合听说能力。
3） 阅读短文，获得相关信息，提高学生们的综合阅读能力。
2. 教学难点
1. 听力训练
2. 阅读 2b 部分的短文并完成相关要求。
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
60
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision
1. Daily greeting. Check the homework.
2. 头脑风暴： 说出表示的职业名词
teacher, nurse, doctor, actor, actress, runner, basketball player, pilot, waiter, computer programmer, pianist,
scientist, violinist ⋯
学生们可以小组为单位进行比赛，看谁写出来的最多。 （在五分钟内）
3. 说理想，谈打算。
I want to be an engineer. I ’ m going to study math.
让学生们依次说出他们的理想及打算如何去做。 （可以用大屏幕提示职业或用学生们自己刚才写的职
业）
Ⅱ. Presentation
1. T: Do you have any New Year ’ s Resolutions?
Let some Ss answer your questions.
2. Present some other New Year ’ s Resolutions on the big screen.
e.g. learn to play the piano; make the soccer team; get good grades; eat healthier food; get lots of exercise
3. Let Ss try remember these resolutions and think of other resolutions.
Ⅲ. Talking
1. Tell your partners your New Year ’ s Resolutions.
2. S1: I ’ m going to get lots of exercise. I ’ m going to make a basketball team.
S2: I ’ m going to learn another foreign language. I ’ m going to learn French.
S3: ⋯
3. Let Ss say as many resolutions as they can.
Ⅳ. Listening
Work on 1c:
1. Tell Ss to read the resolutions in 1a. Tell Ss to listen and circle the resolutions they hear.
3. Play the recording for the Ss to listen and circle.
4. Check the answers:
Work on 1d:
1. T: Now please look at the chart in 1d. Tell Ss Lucy, Kim and Mike are talking about their New Year ’ s
Resolutions. How are they going to do it? Listen and try to fill in the blanks.
听力指导：本题要求同学们听清他们打算如何做来实现他们各的理想；因此，同学们在听的时候应
将注意力放在 “如何做 ”上；第一遍仅听，努力记住要做的事情；第二遍的时候再写出来。
2. Ss listen to the recording carefully and try to fill in the blanks.
3. Play the recording again and check the answers with the class.
Ⅴ. Group work
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
61
1. Work in groups. Make a list of resolutions and how you are going to make them work. Then discuss with
your group.
2. Ask some pairs to act out the conversations.
3. Ask Ss the two questions:
Did you make any resolutions last year?
Were you able to keep them? Why or why not?
◇总第 24 课时
Ⅰ. Reading
1. T: This passage is about resolutions. Now read the passage quickly and match each paragraph with its
main purpose.
2. Let Ss read the sentences in the box first. Let some Ss say the meanings.
3. Ss read the passage quickly and match each paragraph with its main purpose.
4. Let Ss underline the words and phrases that helped them decide.
Ⅱ. Reading
1. T: Now let ’ s work on 2c. First, let ’ s read the sentences and make sure we know the meanings of all the
sentences. Then read the passage again and chose which paragraph in the passage each sentence goes in.
2. 方法指导：首先，应读懂五个句子的意思；然后，带着这五个句子再次认真阅读短文的内容，特别
是认真阅读空格前后句子的意思，以便根据上下文意及整个段落的意思来确定空格处应填的句子。 综
合段落的主旨大意及空格上下文的意思，确定最贴切的答案。
3. Ss read carefully and try to find the answers to the questions.
4. Check the answers with the class.
Ⅲ. Reading
1. T: Read the passage again. Then answer the questions with short sentences.
2. 方法指导：首先，读懂这五个问题的意思；然后，带着问题再次阅读短文，为相关问题找到恰当的
答语；如果没有直接的答案，还应根据自己对课文的理解并结合自己的生活经验来给出一个恰当的答
案。如：第 4 和第 5 小题都应是回答自己的想法。
3. Ss try to answer the questions. Then discuss the answers with your partners.
Explanation
1. Some resolutions have to do with better planning, ⋯ 有些决定与合理的时间规划相关， ⋯⋯
1) 此句中的 planning 为名词， 表示 “计划； 规划 ”等意思， 如：city planning（城市规划） 等。英语中 better
planning 类似汉语中的 “合理规划 ”，指通过制定计划来更加充分的利用时间、空间、精力等。
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
62
2) have to do with 这个结构表示 “与 ⋯⋯ 相关；与 ⋯⋯ 有关联或有关系 ”。例如： What does this problem
have to do with wh at we ’ re learning today?
这道题跟我们今天所学的内容有什么关系？
2. Sometimes the resolutions may be too difficult to keep.
有时这些决定可能会太难而无法实现。
此处情态动词 may 表示推测， 相当于汉语的 “可能； 或许； 大概 ”之意。 又如： You may be right this time,
but I ’ m not sure. 这一次你或许是对的，但我无法确定。
2) 英语中 too ⋯ to ⋯是一种固定结构，表示 “太 ⋯⋯ 而不能够 ⋯⋯”。又如：
The kid is too young to play this game.
这孩子太小，不能玩这个游戏。
3) 本句中的动词 keep 意为 “履行（诺言等） ；遵守（惯例等） ”，这是 keep 的常见用法之一。类似的句
子还有：
People hardly ever keep them!
人们很少履行它们（指计划） 。
在这一语义下，常见的表示还有 keep a promise(信守诺言 )，keep one ’s word(遵守承诺；说话算数 )等。
如：
We always keep our word.
我们说话是算数的。
Homework
1. 课后阅读短文，试着复述课文，总结课文出现的重难点词组及表达方式。
2. 完成 2e 的任务；用这些词组来造句。
板书设计：
Section B1 1a-2e
New words: resolution, team, foreign, question, meaning, discuss, promise, beginning,
write down, physical, have to do with; self-improvement, take up, hobby, weekly,
schoolwork
Sentence Structures:
① ─What are you going to do next year?
─I’m going to take guitar lessons.
② Many resolutions have to do with self-improvement.
③ They’re going to take up a hobby like painting.
④ Sometimes the resolutions may be too difficult to keep.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
63
◇总第 25 课时
Section B2 3a-Self check
一、教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 复习一般将来时态的构成。掌握生词 own, personal, relationship
2) 能够综合运用一般将来时态及所给的提示词来完成阅读填空的任务。
3) 能够综合运用所学的知识来学习写作自己的新年决心。
4）通过完成 Self check 的中练习题来全面复习一般将来时态的用法。
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
每个人都有自己的梦想和对未来的打算， 对于将来想要从事的职业也充满了憧憬。 人们以常谈论他们
的设想，因此，应通过学习这单元的内容来激发学生们的学习主动性和学习兴趣，使他们更加有理想，
并为实现自己的理想而不断努力。
二、教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 能够综合运用一般将来时态及所给的提示词来完成阅读填空的任务。
2）能够综合运用所学的知识来学习写作自己的新年决心。
2. 教学难点：
能够综合运用所学的知识来学习写作自己的新年决心。
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision
1. Have a dictation of the new words and expressions.
2. Fill in the blanks of the main idea of the passage in 2b: (On the big screen)
1. A resolution is a kind of p ________. We usually make resolutions at the b_______ of the year. We hope
to i_______ our lives.
2. Some resolutions are about p_______ health. Many resolutions have to do with self-improvement. Some
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
64
resolutions have to do with better planning, like making a w_______ plan for s___________.
3. Review the phrases. And make a sentence with it.
1) 在 ⋯⋯ 的开端 _________________ 2) 写下；记录下 _________________
3) 关于；与有关系 _________________ 4) 学着做；开始 做 ___________________
5) 有相同之处 ________________ 6) 太⋯⋯ 而不能 ________________
7) 向某人许诺 _____________ 8) 提高某人的生活 ___________
Ⅱ. Lead-in
1. Ask Ss about their New Year ’ s Resolutions:
e.g.
T: What ’ s your New Year ’ s Resolutions, Mary?
Mary: I want to take up volleyball next term.
T: Great! What about you, Jack?
Jack：I ’ m going to make a soccer team. And we ’ re going to practice soccer every weekend.
⋯
2. Present some new words on the big screen. Explain them to the Ss. Ss try to remember them.
own, personal, relationship
Ⅲ. Reading
1. Tell Ss to work on 3b. Complete the first two paragraphs about resolutions with the words in the box.
2. 写作指导：
首先，阅读方框中的词汇，掌握其意思，然后阅读短文，整体把握短文大意。
其次，分析有空格的每个句子，根据上下文意及句子结构确定空格处应填哪一个词。
最后，将单词填在空格上，并完整的读一遍短文，看是否通顺。
3. Ss try to read the article and try to fill in the blanks.
4. Check the answers with the Ss.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
65
◇总第 26 课时
Ⅰ. Writing
Work on 3b:
1. Read the headings below. Think about your own resolutions.
2. Write your own resolutions under the following heading.
(If you don ’ t have any ideas, you may go through the passage in 2b. )
3. Ss try to think about their own resolutions and try to write them down.
4. Check the answers with your partners.
Work on 3c:
1. Tell Ss to use the notes in 3b and write three more paragraphs about their resolutions.
In each paragraph, write what they are going to do and why.
2. 写作指导：
本文为写自己决心、及做法，并说明原因。
因此，时态应用一般将来时态；
应先根据 3b 的想法，说明自己的决心；然后，具体说一下自己打算怎样去实现这个理由；
最后，再简单地说一些做此事的原因。
应注意一般将来时态的结构（ be going to ），不要丢掉 be 动词 am。这是同学们最易出现的错
误。
3. 学生们根据写作提示，及上面表格中的提示来写作这篇文章。
4. Let some Ss read their passage to the class.
Ⅱ. Discussing
1. Discuss the environment in your city. Are the street and the park clean? Is the air clean? Is it quiet or
noisy?
2. Tell Ss: It ’ s everyone ’ s duty to keep our city clean and tidy. Can you think of a plan to make it cleaner and
greener?
3. Give Ss some examples:
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
66
We’ re going to make the subway better. Then people don ’ t have to drive to work.
We’ re going to plant more trees and flowers in the park and street.
⋯
4. Ss try to write about their own plans on a piece of paper.
5. Let some Ss read out their plans. See who has a best one.
Ⅲ. Self check
Work on Self check 1:
1. Match the jobs with the school subjects.
2. Check the answers. Then let some Ss make some sentences with them. e.g.
I want to be a computer programmer. I ’ m going to study computer science.
3. 指导： 复习运用句型结构： I want to be ⋯ , I ’ m going to ⋯
4. 学生自主写句子，然后相互检查答案。
Work on Self check 2
1. Tell Ss to read the conversation and fill in the blanks with the right words.
2. Ss work by themselves.
3. Check the answers and explain some main points. e.g.
第三行： How; going; 分析句子结构， 主、 谓、宾语都有， 可知应缺少状语成分； 句意： 你打算如何做？
3. 学生们分角色表演这个对话。
Work on Self check 3
1. Tell Ss to make their own plans using the phrases below.
2. Ss work with their partners. Write down their own plans.
3. Let some Ss read their plans. Correct any mistakes.
Homework
1. Review Section B.
2. Interview five of your friends. Ask them what they ’ re going to do next weekend. Then write a report.
板书设计：
Section B2 3a-Self check
3a： are; help; make; take; is; learn; listen
3c: one possible version:
The second resolution is about improving my physical health. I ’ m going to get more
exercise and eat more vegetables. (Because my parents say I’m kind of thin.) The third
resolution is about improving my relationships with my family and friends. I ’ m going to
help mom cook meal and do the dishes. I ’ m going to play games with my friends.
(Because we can understand each other well through games. )
Self check 2: want; to be; How, going; going; Where; going; going; to be; going
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
67
◇总第 27 课时
Unit 7 Will people have robots?
Section A 1 (1a-2d)
一、 教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 能掌握以下单词： paper, pollution, prediction, future, pollute, environment, planet, earth, plant, part,
play a part
2) 能掌握以下句型：
① What will the future be like?
Cities will be more polluted. And there will be fewer trees.
② Will people use money in 100 years?
③ Will there be world peace?
④ Kids will study at home on computers.
⑤ They won ’t go to school.
2) 能了解以下语法：
will + 动词原形 来表达一般将来时态。
3） 学会表达自己对未来的看法；学会谈论自己未来的打算。
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
通过引导学生展望未来，及对未来生活的设计，来达到前景教育的目的，同时也通过对前景的设
想，让学生在潜移默化中反省自己的现状，使之对目前的学习、生活习惯作适当的调整，并不断的改
善自己的现状，使学生的理想观和价值观更为科学，更具发展价值。
二、 教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 学习掌握一般将来时态的意义和结构。
2) 掌握 There be 句型的一般将来时态的结构。
2. 教学难点：
掌握 more/fewer ； more/less 的用法。
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
68
情态动词 will + 动词原形来表达一般将来时态。
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Lead-in
1. 在大屏幕上向学生展示一些机器人的图片， 让学生们说出谈论自己的未来的工作， 对工作的打算等：
What do you want to be when you grow up?
Ss: I want to be a scientist.
T: How are you going to do that?
Ss: I’m going to study science hard.
⋯.
2. 学生们根据图片来引导出机器人这一话题。
Ⅱ. Presentation
1. 引导学生们看大屏幕上的图片，根据图示来理解 will 来表达一般将来时态。
用一句话来让学生们明白一般将来时态：
I ’m thirteen years old now. And I will be fifteen years old in two years.
现在我十三岁，两年后我将是十五岁。
2. 让学生们看大屏幕上图片， 并让学生学习 will + 动词原形及 won’t + 动词原形的用法。 通过例句让
学生们理解。
Ⅲ. Game
1. How will your future be like in 100 years? Can you see anything about it?
2. Ss discuss and think about their future. Then say some sentences.
e.g. People will have robots at their home.
There will be only one country.
People won’t use money in the future.
⋯
(同学们如果自己想象不出来，可以根据大屏幕的图片提示来说句子。 )
4. How will the world be different 100 years from now? Read the predictions in 1a. Check A for agree or D
for disagree.
Ss read the sentences discuss them and check A or D .
Ⅳ. Listening
1. T: Now listen to the recording and circle the predictions you hear in 1a.
2. Play the recording for the Ss to listen and circle the predictions.
3. Play the recording again. Check the answers with the Ss.
Ⅴ. Pair work
1. Let Ss read the first conversation in 1c after the teacher.
2. Then let Ss ask and answer questions about the predictions in 1a. Then make their own conversation.
注意：如果将陈述句变为一般疑问句，应将情态动词 will 提前到主语前便可。
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
69
3. Let some pairs ask and answer about their conversations.
Ⅵ. Listening
Work on 2a:
1. Read the sentences in 2a. Tell Ss they will listen to some sentences. They should listen and circle the
words in the bracket.
2. Play the recording for the Ss to listen and circle the words.
3. Play the recording again to check the answers.
Work on 2b:
1. Let Ss read the sentences below. Explain some main sentences for the Ss. Make sure they know what to do.
2. Play the recording for the Ss to check the predictions they hear.
3. Play the recording again to check the answers.
Ⅶ. Pair work
1. Tell Ss ask and answer questions about the predictions in 2a and 2b.
2. Let Ss read conversation in 2c first after the teacher.
3. Ss talk about the predictions with the information in 2a and 2b.
4. Ask some pairs to act their conversations.
Ⅷ. Role-play
1. Read the conversations and answer the questions:
1) What will the future be like in the book?
2) What can people do?
2. Explain some new words and main points in the conversation.
be in great danger, move to other planets; play a part;
3. Read the conversation after the teacher.
4. Practice the conversation with their partner. Then let some pairs to act out the conversation.
Homework:
1. Recite the conversation in 2d after school.
2. 用下列词组来造句：
(1) be more crowded and polluted (2) be fewer trees
(3) be in great danger (4) on the earth
(5) less water (6) playa part
板书设计：
Section A1 (1a-2d)
单词： paper, pollution, prediction, future, pollute, environment, planet, earth,
plant, part, play a part
句型：
① What will the future be like? Cities will be more polluted. And there will
be fewer trees.
② Will people use money in 100 years?
③ Will there be world peace?
④ Kids will study at home on computers.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
70
◇总第 28 课时
Section A2 (Grammar Focus-3c)
一、 教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 学习掌握下列词汇： peace, sea, sky
2) 进行一步复习巩固运用 Section A 部分所学的生词和词组。
3) 进一步学习运用所学的知识来陈述自己对将来的看法；学会谈论自己的对将来的预言。
4) 掌握情态动词 will 来表达一般将来时态这一语法知识；
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
通过引导学生展望未来，及对未来生活的设计，来达到前景教育的目的，同时也通过对前景的设
想，让学生在潜移默化中反省自己的现状，使之对目前的学习、生活习惯作适当的调整，并不断的改
善自己的现状，使学生的理想观和价值观更为科学，更具发展价值。
二、 教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 进一步学习运用所学的知识来陈述自己对将来的看法；学会谈论自己的对将来的预言。
2) 掌握情态动词 will 来表达一般将来时态这一语法知识；并运用所学的知识来表达将来的活动。
2. 教学难点：
掌握情态动词 will 来表达一般将来时态这一语法知识；
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision
1. Have a dictation of the new words learned in the last class.
2. Ask some Ss to give some predictions.
T: What’s your prediction about the future?
S1: There will be less free time.
S2：There will be more pollution.
3. Role-play the conversation in 2d.
Ⅱ. Grammar Focus.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
71
1. 学生阅读 Grammar Focus 中的句子，然后做填空练习。
① 将来会是什么样子？
② What ______the ____ be _____?
城市污染将会更多。且树木将会更少。
Cities ____ ___ _____ polluted. And there ____ _____ _______.
③ 一百年后，人们会使用钱币吗？
____ people ____ money ___ 100 years?
④ 不会的。一切东西将会免费。
No, they ______. Everything ____ ___ _____.
⑤ 世界将会有和平吗？
______ ____ _____ world peace?
⑥ 是的，我希望如此。
Yes, I ______ _____.
⑦ 孩子们将会在家中在电脑上学习。
Kids _____ ______ at home _____ _______.
⑧ 他们将不会去上学？
They ______ _______ to school.
2. 学生们根据记忆，看大屏幕来完成填空练习。
3. 学生们完成填空试题后，可以打开课本检查答案，对错误的句子，单独进行强化记忆。
Ⅲ. Try to Find
一、一 般将来时态
肯定式：主语 + will + 动词原形
Kids will study at home on computers.
孩子们将会在家里的电脑上学习。
否定式：主语 + won’t + 动词原形
People won ’ t use money in 100 years.
一百年后人们将不再使用钱币。
一般疑问句式：
Will + 主语 + 其他？
肯定回答： Yes , 主语 + will.
否定回答： No, 主语 + won’t.
人们将会有更多的空闲时间吗？
是的，会。 / 不，不会。
Will people have more free time?
Yes, they will. /No, they won ’ t.
二、 There be 句型：
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
72
1. there be 句型表示客观存在的“有” （所有者不明确） 。例如：
有湖边有很多树。
_____ _______ many trees near the lake.
be 动词有 ______ _______ 两种形式。
2. be 动词形式的确定要根据其后面的名词 单复数形式来确定。
_____ _____ an apple tree in the park.
_____ ______ many people in the park today.
3. There be 句型的一般将来时结构：
肯定式： There + ________ + 其他
否定式： There + ___________ + 其他
一般疑问句： ____________ + be + 其他 ?
答语： Yes, there will. / No, there won ’ t.
三、
可数名词
1. more +
不可数名词
2. less + 不可数名词
3. fewer + 可数名词
Ⅳ. Practice
Work on 3a:
1. Tell Ss to read the conversation in 3a and try to fill in the blanks with more/ less or fewer.
2. 方法指导：应通读整个对话，掌握对话大意；
然后，根据空格后的名词是可数名词还是不可数名词来确定是用 more, less 还是 fewer。
注意，有些名词前有形容词来修饰。
3. 最后，教师与同学们一起校对答案，并对学生们有疑问的地方进行解释。
4. 学生们阅读这些句子并试着记住这些句子。
Work on 3b:
1. 让学生们阅读句子的开头，明白每个句子的意思。
2. 让学生们思考一下针对这一情况，在将来会发生什么样的情况。
3. 让学生们互相检查自己所写的句子，发现并改正错误。
4. 让部分学生说一说自己所写的句子。大家一起改正句子中的错误。
Ⅴ. Group work
1. 小组中的同学们对未来的城市进行讨论。
2. 每个成员发表自己的想法，小组长进行记录，并进行汇总。
3. 最后，同学们根据小组 成员的想法，然后，展开想象，试着每名同学们画一幅未来城市的画。
4. 最后，比较一下每个小组的画，看哪个小组画得较好。
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
73
5. 试着对自己小组里的情况用英语做成一个报告。
Ⅵ. Exercises
If time is enough, do some more exercises on big screen.
根据下列表格的内容完成后面的句子：
根据上面的表格用 more, less, fewer 填空。
There will be __________ house There will be __________ pollution
There will be __________ schools There will be _________ people
There will be ___________ snow There will be ________ movie theaters
Homework
1. 复习 Grammar Focus 中的内容。
展开你想象的翅膀，想一下 50 年后，你的生活将会怎么样？并写六个句子来描述一下。
In fifty years, ⋯
板书设计
Garden City
now In 100 years
600 houses 1000 houses
A lot of pollution Almost no pollution
Seven schools Two schools
2400 people 3500 people
A lot of snow A little snow
Six movie theaters Two movie theaters
Section A2 Grammar Focus-3c
3a: 1. less; more 2. more; more 3. less; fewer 4. more, more 5. more,
fewer
3b: 1. I will almost see the blue skies every day.
2. people will live to be 200 years old.
3. families will spend time together every day.
3c: Report:
There will be more people in the future. Because people will live to be
200 years old. There will be more high buildings. The cities will be more
crowed but less polluted. Because there will be less cars and there will be
more buses and e-bikes. People will mostly work on the internet. There
will be more robots working in the factory.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
74
◇总第 29 课时
Section B1 1a-2e
一、 教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 能掌握以下单词： apartment, rocket, space, space station, even, human, servant, dangerous, already,
factory, simple, over and over again, believe, hundreds of, inside, disagree, shape, fall, fall down, look for,
possible, impossible
2) 能掌握以下句型：
① —Where do you live ？ —I live in an apartment.
② There are already robots working in factories.
③ It’s easy for children to wake up and know where they are.
④ That may not seem possible now, but computers and rockets seemed impossible 100 years ago.
3) 能综合运用 will 表达一般将来时态。
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
通过引导学生展望未来， 及对未来生活的设计， 来达到前景教育的目的， 同时也通过对前景的设想，
让学生在潜移默化中反省自己的现状，使之对目前的学习、生活习惯作适当的调整，并不断的改善自
己的现状，使学生的理想观和价值观更为科学，更具发展价值。
二、 教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 掌握本课时出现的生词及表达方式。
2) 进行听力训练，提高综合听说能力。
3） 阅读短文，获得相关信息，提高学生们的综合阅读能力。
2. 教学难点
1. 听力训练
2. 阅读 2b 部分的短文并完成相关要求。
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision
1. Daily greeting.
2. 复习情态动词 will 构成的一般将来时态的构成。
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
75
3. 复习 more, fewer, less 后面所跟名词的情况。
4. 让学生们谈谈自己所画的未来城市的前景情况。
Ⅱ. Lead in
1. Ask Ss some questions:
T: What will do in the future?
T: Where will you live?
T: How will you go to work?
Get some Ss think and answer the questions.
2. Present some new words on the big screen. e.g.
apartment, rocket, space, space station, human, servant, factory⋯
3. Explain some main words to the Ss . Give some examples on the big screen.
simple, over and over again, believe, hundreds of, disagree, shape, fall, fall down, look for, possible,
impossible even, dangerous, already
4. Work on 1a. Write each word in the correct column below.
Ⅲ. Discussion
1. Work with your partners. Think of other words and write them in the chart in 1a.
2. Let Ss discuss the words and write them in the chart.
3. Let some Ss read the words.
Ⅳ. Listening
Work on 1c:
1. Tell Ss to listen to Alexis and Joe ’s conversation. and Number the pictures 1-3.
2. Play the recording for the Ss. Ss just listen for the first time. Play the recording again and number the
pictures.
3. Play the recording and check the answers with the Ss.
Work on 1d:
1. T: Now please read the sentences in 1d. Tell Ss they'll listen to the tape again. Then try to fill in the blanks
with the words in the chart.
听力指导： 通过事物读句子及空格中的单词，可以看出，本听力重点要求我们听清句子的时态，因
此我们在听时应重点听句子的谓语动词，并明确其时态。如果不能快速写下来，可以先做标记，在听
完后再写完整。
2. Ss listen to the recording carefully and try to fill in the blanks.
3. Play the recording again and check the answers with the class.
4. Tell Ss one is Alexis and the other is Joe. Talk about Joe’s life now, 10 years ago and 10 years from now.
Ⅴ. Discussion
1. Work in groups. Tell your partner what you know about robots. What do they look like and what can they
do?
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
76
2. Ask some Ss describe the robots they know.
◇总第 30 课时
Ⅰ. Reading
1. T: Are you interested in robots? Do you want to have a robot?
2. Let Ss read the passage quickly and complete sentences below about what robots can do now.
3. Ss read the passage quickly and complete the three sentences.
4. Check the answers with the Ss.
Ⅱ. Reading
1. T: Now let ’s work on 2c. This time you should read the passage a little more carefully. Then write three
sentences about what robots will be able to do in the future.
2. 方法指导：明确我们这次阅读的任务，然后，带着这个任务再次认真阅读短文的内容，并在相关段
落中认真查找未来机器人所能做的事情。 并写出正确的答案。
3. Ss read carefully and try to write the three sentences.
4. Check the answers with the class.
Ⅲ. Reading
1. T: Read the passage again. This time you should read the passage and fill in the blanks in this paragraph
with words in the article.
2. 方法指导：首先，阅读这个小短文，了解其大意；然后，在理解小短文意思的基础上，重点阅读有
空格的句子，并在原文中找与之相关的段落或句子，并填写出正确的答案。
3. Let some Ss talk about their answers.
Homework
1. 课后阅读短文，试着复述课文，总结课文出现的重难点词组及表达方式。
2. 完成 2e 中的任务，并将句子写在作业本。
板书设计：
Section B1 1a-2e
单词： apartment, rocket, space, space station, even, human, servant, dangerous,
already, factory, over and over again, believe, hundreds of, inside, disagree, shape, fall, fall
down, look for, possible, impossible
句型：
① —Where do you live ？ —I live in an apartment.
② There are already robots working in factories.
③ It’s easy for children to wake up and know where they are.
④ That may not seem possible now, but computers and rockets seemed impossible 100
years ago.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
77
◇总第 31 课时
Section B2 3a-Self check
一、 教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 掌握下列生词 : probably, during, holiday, word
2) 复习用 will 表达一般将来时态的用法。结合机器人这一话题表达自己的想法。
3） 能够综合运用所掌握的知识来描述自己未来生活的情况。
3) 通过自己描述自己未来生活的情况来达到熟练运用所学知识的目的。
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
通过引导学生展望未来，及对未来生活的设计，来达到前景教育的目的，同时也通过对前景的设想，
让学生在潜移默化中反省自己的现状，使之对目前的学习、生活习惯作适当的调整，并不断的改善自
己的现状，使学生的理想观和价值观更为科学，更具发展价值。
二、 教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 能运用所学的知识及提示来阅读相关个人未来生活预测，并能完成相关任务。
2）能运用所学的知识与句型表达方式来描绘一下自己未来的生活。
3） 复习要单元所学的重点知识点，并完成相关复习任务。
2. 教学难点：
能运用所学的知识与句型表达方式来描绘一下自己未来的生活。
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision
1. Have a dictation of the new words and expressions.
2. Review the main phrases learned yesterday.
(1) 在工厂 __________ (2) 帮助做某事 ________
(3) 感到乏味 _________________
(4) 在将来 ______________
(5) 试着做某事 ___________________
(6) 能够 ________________
(7) 倒塌 _______________
(8) 似乎可能 /不可能 _____________
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
78
(9) 许多；大量 __________
3. Talking about the robots:
(1) What can a robot do now?
(2) What will the robots do in the future?
Ⅱ. Lead in
1. Ask some Ss what their life will be in the future.
T: What will you life be in the future?
S1: First, I will go to college. I will study computer science. Then I ’ ll work in Beijing. I will be a computer
programmer in a famous company. Next, I will make a lot of money. I will have my own company like Bill
Gates. I will buy a big house and live with my family in Beijing.
S2: I will be an artist. First, I will study art at an art school. Then, I will move to Paris. I will find a part-time
job there and save some money. At the same time, I will study French. Next, I will hold art exhibitions. I will
become famous. Then I ’ ll have a lot of money. I will tour around the world then.
Ⅲ. Reading
1. Read the article about Jill ’s life in the future. Fill in the blanks with the words in the box.
2. 阅读指导：
首先，阅读短文，整体把握短文大意。
其次，分析有空格的每个句子，看空格处的意思，联系所给单词的意思，进行综合分析，确定空格处
应填的单词。例如：第一空，由下文“在那座城市里有更多的工作” ，可知本空填 live“居住”一词。
最后，再通读一遍短文，看是否通顺合理。
3. Ss try to read the article and try to fill in the blanks.
4. Check the answers with the Ss.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
79
◇总第 32 课时
Ⅰ. Writing
Work on 3b:
1. Think about your life 20 years from now. Write down some notes in the chart below.
You can add more items.
2. Give some examples to the Ss.
3. Ss try to think about their lives 20 years from now. Write notes for their own reviews.
4. Try to fill in the blanks.
Work on 3c
1. Write about your life 20 years from now using the notes in 3b.
2. 写作指导：
本文为写自己未来 20 年后的生活情况。
因此，时态应用一般将来时态（ will + 动词原形） ；
首先，可根据在 3b 中的提示，介绍一下自己打算的工作、及生活的地点、自己的业余活动等
情况。
然后再展开自己想象的翅膀，对自己的生活环境及其他方面大胆想象，并写出来。
最后，通读一遍短文，重点检查一下各句子的时态及语句是否通顺。
3. 学生们根据写作提示，及上面表格中的提示来写作这篇文章。
4. Let some Ss read their passage to the class.
Ⅱ. Discussion
1. Discuss how a robot will help students with schoolwork in the future. Write down your group ’ s ideas and
draw a picture of your robot.
2. Give Ss an example:
I think students won ’ t need write words on the paper because robots will write down everything you think.
3. Ss discuss with their partners and try to draw the robots they think about.
4. At last, let some Ss talk about their robots and pictures of the robots.
Ⅲ. Self check
Work on Self check 1:
1. Put the words in the correct columns in the chart.
2. Make sure Ss know what they should.
3. 引导学生们复习 more/fewer/less 的用法：
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
80
more 后面可跟可数名词或不可数名词；
fewer 后面跟可数名词；
less 后面跟不可数名词；
4. 学生将以上单词分类，并校对答案。
5. 学生们可以试着多增加一些单词，并将它们填写在方框中。
Work on Self check 2
1. Tell Ss to read the conversation below. Then Fill in the blanks in the conversation.
2. Do the first one for the Ss as a model:
(1. be; like 在本句中是介词，意为“像” ，因此本句中缺少 be 动词，句中有情态动词 will ，故应用
be 动词的原形。 )
3. Ss try to fill in the blanks with the right words.
4. Check the answers with the class.
Homework
1. Review Section B.
2. 根据第 4 部分中同学们对学习机器人的想象，来写一篇 60 字左右的小短文来描述一下你所想象的
机器人的形状、大小及他在学习方面提供哪些帮助。
板书设计：
Section B2 3a-Self check
3a： live; more; fewer; less; keep; wear; look; work, take
3c: one possible version:
In 20 years, I think I ’ ll be a pilot. I ’ ll work in Beijing, because my parents work in
Beijing. I want to live with them. I ’ ll live in a large apartment. As a pilot, I can have a few
days off very month. I think I ’ ll keep some plants in my apartment. There ’ ll be a park near
my home. I ’ ll take a walk after supper. I like chess, so I can also play chess with my
friends in the park.
Self check 1: more/fewer: job, people, robot， planet, car, city, building, tree
more/less: pollution, fresh water, paper, clean air, free time, money
Self check 2: 1. be; 2. like 3. will, will 4. will 5. there, be 6. will
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
81
◇总第 33 课时
Unit 8 How do you make a banana milk shake?
Section A 1 (1a-2d)
一、 教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 能掌握以下单词： shake, milk shake, blender, turn on, peel, pour, yogurt, honey, watermelon, spoon,
pot, add, finally, salt
能掌握以下句型：
① ─How do you make a banana milk shake?
─First, peel the bananas⋯
② ─How many bananas do we need?
─We need three bananas.
③ ─How much yogurt do we need?
─We need one cup of yogurt.
2) 能了解以下语法：
掌握用 how much 和 how many 对事物的数量提问。
3) 学会描述做一些常见食物的过程，并能正确地运用表示顺序的词汇。
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
1. 通过制作食物的介绍 , 培养学生的实际生活能力 , 了解生活知识 , 增长生活阅历 , 培养实践操作能
力和动手能力。
2. 通过食物制作过程的介绍 , 让学生认识到劳动成果的来之不易 , 使之懂得不能浪费食物 , 珍惜他人
的劳动成果。
二、 教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 用 how much 与 how many 来对数量提问。
2) 动词词组；描述过程的顺序词。
2. 教学难点：
能恰当地使用祈使句表达食物的制作过程。
三、教学过程
I . Warming up
1. T: What ’ s your favorite fruit?
S: apple, orange, strawberry, banana, pear, watermelon.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
82
2. T： What’s your favorite drink?
S: Cola/ milk/ juice/ tea/milk shake ⋯
II. Lead-in
T: Great, those taste nice. Today we are going to learn how to make a banana milk shake. How many bananas
do we need? How much milk do we need?
S: ⋯.
Teacher shows the pictures to students, and makes students know the process of making milk shake. Then
write down the key words on the blackboard.
2. Do 1a. Ask Ss to write the names of the actions. Choose the correct words. Ask Ss to fill in the blanks on
their own. Then check the answers.
3. Teach the names of all items. Point to the pictures of the items and ask students to repeat.
Focus on the pictures. Ask the students to tell what they see in the picture. Describe each action and ask
students to repeat the following:
peel the bananas, cut up the bananas, put the bananas and the , milk in the blender, pour the milk in the
blender, Turn on the blender; drink the milk shake.
4. Point out the actions in the picture and the list of actions in activity 1b .
Play the recording and check the answers. Ask students to recite the conversation at once.
Ⅲ. Listening
1b Listen and put the instructions in order.
Ⅳ. Game
1. Show some pictures in the big screen.
2. Let Ss tell what they can see.
3. Let Ss try their best to say how to make a banana milk shake.
Ⅴ. Pair work
Work on 1c:
1. Let Ss read the model with a partner.
2. Use the information in 1b. Ask and answer with a partner.
3. Let some pairs ask and answer about the chart.
How much How many wash first
One box of 2 bananas peel then
cut up next
put⋯into blender after that
turn on⋯ last
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
83
Ⅵ. Listening
Work on 2a:
1. Let Ss look at the pictures below. Let one student read the words in the pictures if necessary.
2. Play the recording for the Ss to listen and complete the chart.
3. Play the recording again to check the answers.
Work on 2b:
1. Let Ss read the chart below. Tell Ss that they should write the ingredient under the correct amount in the
chart.
2. Play the recording for the Ss to write the correct answers in the chart.
3. Play the recording again to check the answers.
Ⅶ. Pair work
1. Tell Ss to ask and answer questions about how to make fruit salad.
2. Give a model to the Ss.
3. Ss work in pairs. Try to ask and answer about how to make fruit salad.
4. Ask some pairs to act out their conversations.
Ⅷ. Role-play
1. Read the conversations and fill in the chart below.
one cabbage
one
three
four
five
some
2. Explain some new words and main points in the conversation.
① one more thing 另外一件事情
another ten minutes 再多十分钟
“数字 + more + 物品 ” 指“另外的⋯⋯”
“ another + 数字 + 物品 ” 指“另外的⋯⋯”
当数字为 one 时，常与 more 连用或只用 another
Give me two more hamburgers, please. 请再给我两个汉堡。
The boys rode another two hours.
那些男孩子们又骑了两个小时。
Do you want one more cup of tea?
Do you want another cup of tea?
你想再来杯茶吗？
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
84
② forget to do sth. 忘记（去）做某事
Don’ t forget to close the windows.
不要忘记关上窗户。
3. Let Ss read the conversation after the teacher.
4. Practice the conversation with their partner. Then let some pairs to act out the conversation.
Homework:
做自己喜欢的水果奶昔，并简要说明过程。
可以用下列表示过程的词汇来让你描述更加清晰明了。
first, next, then, ⋯ finally ⋯
板书设计：
Section A 1 (1a-2d)
Words:
shake, milk shake, blender, turn on, peel, pour, yogurt, honey, watermelon, spoon,
pot, add, finally, salt
Sentence structure:
① ─How do you make a banana milk shake?
─First, peel the bananas⋯
② ─How many bananas do we need?
─We need three bananas.
③ ─How much yogurt do we need?
─We need one cup of yogurt.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
85
◇总第 34 课时
Section A 2 (Grammar focus-3c)
一、 教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 学习掌握下列词汇： sugar, cheese, popcorn , corn, machine, dig, hole
2）进行一步复习巩固学习 Section A 部分所学的生词和词组。
3）掌握正确用 how much 和 how many 对事物的数量进行提问。
4) 能够熟练运用所学的知识，来正确描述做简单食物的过程，正确运用表示顺序的词。
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
1. 通过制作食物的介绍 , 培养学生的实际生活能力 , 了解生活知识 , 增长生活阅
历, 培养实践操作能力和动手能力。
2. 通过食物制作过程的介绍 , 让学生认识到劳动成果的来之不易 , 使之懂得不能
浪费食物 , 珍惜他人的劳动成果。
二、 教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 复习巩固 Section A 部分所学的生词和词组，达到熟练运用的目标。
2) 掌握正确用 how much 和 how many 对事物的数量进行提问。
2. 教学难点：
1) 能够熟练运用所学的知识，来正确描述做简单食物的过程，正确运用表示顺序的词。
2) 能够分清可数名词与不可数名词，会用数量词来计量一些不可数名词。
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision
1. Game: How do you make a banana milk shake?
Let some Ss describe how to make a banana milk shake.
Attention to use “first, next, then, finally ” correctly.
2. How do you make a Russian soup?
Attention to use “first, next, then, finally ” correctly.
Ⅱ. Grammar Focus.
1. 学生阅读 Grammar Focus 中的句子，然后做填空练习。
① 你怎样做香蕉奶昔？ _____ do you _____ banana milk shake?
② 首先，将香蕉剥皮。 ______，_____ the bananas.
③ 接下来，将香蕉放入果汁机中。 ____, _____ the bananas in the blender.
④ 然后，将牛奶倒进果汁机中。 _____, _____ the milk ____ the blender
⑤ 最后，打开果汁机。 ______, _______ ___ the blender.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
86
⑥ 我们需要多少香蕉？ ______ _______ bananas do we need?
⑦ 我们需要三只香蕉。 We ______ three _________.
⑧ 我们需要多少酸奶？ _____ _______ yogurt do we need?
⑨ 我们需要一茶杯。 We need ___ _____ ____ yogurt.
2. 学生们根据记忆，看大屏幕来完成填空练习。
3. 学生们完成填空试题后，可以打开课本检查答案，对错误的句子，单独进行强化记忆。
Ⅲ. Try to Find
一、如何问答名词的数量：
1. 询问不可数名词的数量： _________ +不可数名词⋯⋯ ？
2. 回答不可数名词的数量：
___________ + 不可数名词
一杯 ________; 一碗 ________
3. 询问可数名词的数量： __________ + 可数名词⋯⋯ ？
练一练：句型转换：
① We need three cups of sugar. (提问 ) _________ _______ sugar do we need?
② They need ten tomatoes for the soup. (提问 ) _____ ______ tomatoes do they need?
③ The T-shirt is twenty dollars. ( 提问 ) ______ ______ is the T-shirt?
④ We have five six bottles of juice. ( 提问 ) _____ ______ bottles of juice do you have?
Ⅳ. Practice
Work on 3a:
1. Circle the correct word in each question:
① 1. How (much/many) bananas do we need?
② How (much/many) sugar do we need?
③ How (much/many) bread do we need?
④ How (much/many) tomatoes do we need?
⑤ How (much/many) cheese do we need?
2. 方法指导：指导：应根据括号后面的名词是可数名词还是不可数名词来确定。
比如，第一句中 bananas是可数名词的复数形式，故用 how many 。其他类似。
3. 最后，教师与同学们一起校对答案，并对学生们有疑问的地方进行解释。
V. Work on 3b:
1. 让学生们阅读对话，整体把握对话的意思。
2. 然后仔细读制作爆米花的过程，根据图片及上下文意及时态来确定空格处所应填的词。
第一句话中句子的主语、谓语、宾语都有，故应用副词 how 来构成疑问句。
在第二句话中，空格后有名词 corn，故前面应用 how much 来对其数量提问。
第三句中的主语、谓语有，但没有宾语，故应用 what 来对接下来做“什么事情”进行询问。
在第四句中，空格后有名词 salt，故前面应用 how much 来提问数量。
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
87
3. 和学生们一起校对答案。
4. 让学生们朗读并表演这个对话。
ⅤI . Group work
1. 让学生们看表格中的四个活动项目，让学生们根据自己的生活阅历来选择一个较为熟悉的话题，并
与自己的小组成员进行讨论如何做此事。
2. 将做这个事情的过程例一个较为清晰的单子，并用英语描述一下。
3. 与一位同学一起用英语讨论一下，如何做这个活动。
4. 听一听其他同学们擅长的项目，并表达自己的想法或问题。
(最后，可以经学生们评议来推举谁是最会做事情的同学）
VII . Exercises
If time is enough, do some more exercises on big screen.
重排下列句子，成为一段完整的对话。
A. First, put the water into the pot
B. Next, put the noodles into the pot and cook for ten minutes.
C. How many noodles do we need?
D. How much water do we need?
E. How do we make egg noodles?
F. What do we do next?
G. Five bowls.
H. Half a kilo.
I. Finally, put the egg into the pot and cook for another five minutes.
___, ___, ____, ____, ___, ___, ___, ____
Homework
1. 复习 Grammar Focus 中的内容。
2. 从 3c 中选择一个活动项目，用英语将其过程描写出来。注意正确运用表示顺序
的词汇： fist, next, then, after that, finally 。
板书设计
Section A 2 Grammar Focus-3c
3a: 1. many 2. much 3. much 4. many 5. much
3b: 1. How 2. How much 3. What 4. How much b. First d. turn,
next 答语： 1. b 2. a 3. d 4. e 5. c
3c: A: Do you know how to plant a tree?
B: Yes. First, dig a hole. And put the tree in the hole.
A: What do we do next?
B: Next, put the soil back into the hole.
A: Is that all right?
B: No, finally we should water the tree.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
88
◇总第 35 课时
Section B 1 1a-2e
一、 教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 能掌握以下单词： sandwich, butter, turkey, lettuce, piece, Thanksgiving, traditional, autumn, traveler,
England, celebrate, mix, pepper, fill, oven, plate, cover, gravy, serve, temperature
2) 能掌握以下句式结构：
① ─Do you like lettuce in a sandwich?
─Yes, I do./ No, I don ’t.
② It’s a time to give thanks for food in the autumn.
③ Cut the turkey into thin pieces.
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
1）在活动中渗透中西方餐饮文化，了解西餐的制作方法在语言的运用中感受中西方饮食文化的不
同。
2）通过食物制作过程的介绍 , 让学生认识到劳动成果的来之不易 , 使之懂得不能浪费食物 , 珍惜
他人的劳动成果。
二、 教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 掌握本课时出现的生词及表达方式。
2) 进行听力训练，提高综合听说能力。
3）阅读短文，获得相关信息，提高学生们的综合阅读能力。
2. 教学难点
1). 听力训练
2). 阅读 2b 部分的短文并完成相关要求。
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision
1. Daily greeting. Check the homework.
2. 头脑风暴： 将下列名词分为可数名词与不可数名词。
1） milk 2） tomato 3）teaspoon
4） popcorn 5） yogurt 6） salt
7） apple 8） onion 9） dumpling
10） shake 11） juice 12）meat
13） cup 14）porridge 15）watermelon 16）mutton
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
89
学生们可以小组为单位进行比赛，看谁写出来的最多。 （在五分钟内）
3. 让学们复述如何做爆米花。
S1：First, put half a cup of corn into the popcorn machine. S2：Next, turn on the machine ．
S3: Then, pour the popcorn into a bowl. S4: Finally, put some salt. You can eat it.
４. 让部分学生复述如何植树或其他项目。
Ss try to retell how to plant a tree or other things they can do.
Ⅱ. Presentation
1. Ask Ss that what ingredients they need. Ask two students to say and write the ingredients on the Bb.
Ⅲ. Talking
1. Talk about the ingredients they like in the sandwich.
2. S1: Do you like lettuce in a sandwich? S2: Yes, I do.
S1: Do you like tomatoes? S2: No, I don ’t. What about you?
S1: ⋯
3. Let Ss ask and answer in pairs.
Ⅳ. Listening
Work on 1c:
1. Tell Ss to listen and circle the words they hear in 1a.
3. Play the recording for the Ss to listen and circle.
4. Check the answers:
Work on 1d:
1. T: Now please look at the chart in 1d. Tell Ss to listen again and write the ingredients in the order they hear
them.
听力指导：本题要求同学们听清在做三明治时，每个步骤中所需要的原料；因此，同学们在听的时候
应将注意力放在“每个步骤中的原料”上；第一遍仅听，努力记住这些原料；第二遍的时候再写出来。
2. Ss listen to the recording carefully and try to fill in the blanks.
3. Play the recording again and check the answers with the class.
Ⅴ. Group work
1. Work in groups. Discuss the traditional food people eat on special holidays in China. Then make a list.
2. Ask some Ss to read their lists to the class.
3. Ask some other Ss add more.
Ⅵ. Reading
1. T: Look at the article and the pictures. Can you guess what the passage is mainly about?
Let some Ss try to guess the meaning of the passage.
(It ’s about the turkey dishes in Thanksgiving in the United States.)
2. Let Ss read the passage quickly and number the pictures [1-5].
3. Ss read the passage quickly and number the pictures [1-5].
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
90
4. Check the answers with the Ss.
5. Show the new words on the big screen and teach Ss the new words in the passage.
Ⅶ. Reading
1. T: Now let ’s work on 2c. First, let ’s read the sentences and make sure we know the meanings of all the
sentences. Then read the passage again and try to answer the questions.
2. 方法指导：首先，应读懂五个问题的意思；然后，带着这五个问题再次认真阅读短文的内容，特别
是认真阅读短文中与某问题相关的部分，以便根据上下文意及整个段落的意思来确定如何回答这个问
题。 综合上下文的意思，确定最贴切的答案。
3. Ss read carefully and try to find the answers to the questions.
4. Check the answers with the class.
Ⅷ. Reading
1. T: Now let ’s read the short passage in 2d. It’s the instructions for making a turkey dinner written in different
way. Put them in order. Write First, Next, Then and finally in the blanks.
Read the passage again. Then answer the questions with short sentences.
2. 方法指导：首先，通读这五个句子的意思；然后，根据上次读短文时的印象，将制作火鸡宴的过程
排为正确的顺序；如果没有记住制作火鸡宴的过程，还应再去 2b 的短文中有关制件火鸡的部分去读一
下。并最终排成正确的顺序。
3. Ss try to answer put the sentences in order. Check the answers.
Ⅸ. Discussion
1. T: Show some special days in China on the big screen. Ask: What do you think is the most special day in
China? Then Let Ss say the special food in the special days.
2. Ask the questions in 2e. Ss think and answer the questions.
3. Let some Ss say their answers.
Homework
1. 课后阅读短文，试着复述课文，总结课文出现的重难点词组及表达方式。
2. 课下再根据 2e 部分的内容；选择自己认为重要的节日，并写出你较为熟悉的食物的制作过程。
板书设计：
Section B 1 1a-2e
New words:
sandwich, butter, turkey, lettuce, piece, Thanksgiving, traditional, autumn, traveler,
England, celebrate, mix, pepper, fill, oven, plate, cover, gravy, serve, temperature
Sentence Structures:
① ─Do you like lettuce in a sandwich?
─Yes, I do./ No, I don ’t.
② It’s a time to give thanks for food in the autumn.
③ Cut the turkey into thin dishes.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
91
◇总第 36 课时
Section B 2 3a-Self check
一、 教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 复习如何制作火鸡宴，以及其他学生们熟悉的传统食物的制作过程。
2) 能够综合运用所学的知识以及根据所给的提示词来完成阅读填空的任务。
3) 能够综合运用所学的知识来学习写作自己所熟悉的食物的制作过程以及所需的原料。
4）通过完成 Self check 的中练习题来全面复习 how much 和 how many 的用法。
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
1. 通过制作食物的介绍 , 培养学生的实际生活能力 , 了解生活知识 , 增长生活阅历 , 培养实践操作能
力和动手能力。
2. 通过食物制作过程的介绍 , 让学生认识到劳动成果的来之不易 , 使之懂得不能浪费食物 , 珍惜他人
的劳动成果。
二、 教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 能够综合运用所学的知识以及根据所给的提示词来完成阅读填空的任务。
2) 能够综合运用所学的知识来学习写作自己较为熟悉的食物的制作过程。
2. 教学难点：
能够综合运用所学的知识来学习写作自己较为熟悉的食物的制作过程。
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision
1. Fill in the blanks of the main idea of the passage in 2b: (On the big screen)
Thanksgiving is a s_______ holiday in the U.S.A. It always on the f______ Thursday in November. There
are many r______ for this special day. For some people, it is a time to give thanks for food in the a______. At
this time people also remember the first t_______ from E______ about 500 years ago. These days most
Americans still have a big meal at home to c________ it. The main dish of this meal is almost always
t________.
How to make a turkey dinner?
First, m____ together some bread pieces, onions, salt and pepper. F___the turkey with this bread mix.
Next, put the turkey in a hot oven and c____ it for a few hours. Then, place the turkey on a large plate and
c_______ it with gravy.
F_____, serve it to your friends with some other food.
2. Check the answers with the Ss.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
92
3. Ask your partner his/her most special day in China.
Ⅱ. Lead-in
1. Ask Ss about what special food in the town (city) they live?
e.g. Mapo toufu, Gongbaojiding, dumplings, ⋯
T: Well, my favourite food is Yunnan Rice Noodles.
Do you know how to make it?
Now, let ’s read the passage in 3a and find how to make it.
2. Show some pictures of Yunnan Rice Noodles on the big screen.
Let Ss discuss the ingredients in this special food.
Ⅲ. Reading
1. Tell Ss to work on 3a. First, read the words in the box. Try to make sure the meaning of each words.
2. 写作指导：
首先，阅读方框中的词汇，掌握其意思，然后阅读短文，整体把握短文大意。
其次，分析有空格的每个句子，根据上下文意及句子结构确定空格处应填哪一个词。
最后，将单词填在空格上，并完整的读一遍短文，看是否通顺。
3. Ss try to read the article and try to fill in the blanks.
4. Check the answers with the Ss.
① have; 由括号中的句子“ Of course, you can also have other things ⋯ 当然你可也可以准备其他的东
西⋯⋯ ”，可知空格处应为 have 一词。
② First; 通过读下文及关键词 then，可知下面是在 叙述制作云南米线的过程。这是第一步。
③ wash；句意“将生菜洗净并切碎。 ”
④ Next ；读短文可知，在第一步完成后，这是接一下的一个步骤，故空格处用 next。
⑤ cut; 句意“将鸡肉切成碎片。 ”
⑥ put; 由后面的介词 in，可知这是 put ⋯in 词组。句意“将鸡蛋、肉及生菜等逐个放入热汤中” 。
⑦ Finally ；读短文可知这是制作的最后一个步骤， 故应填 finally 一词。 句意 “最后， 将米线放入汤中”
⑧ enjoy；句意“现在是该享受米线的时候了。 ”。
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
93
◇总第 37 课时
Ⅰ. Writing
Work on 3b:
1. Read the headings below. Think about your own favorite food in your hometown.
2. Then make a list of the ingredients of the food.
(If you don ’t have any ideas, you may look at the food in P62. )
3. Ss try to think about the ingredients of the food and try to write them down.
4. Check the answers with your partners.
Work on 3c:
1. Tell Ss to use the notes in 3b and write a recipe for your favorite food.
(Write about the ingredients you need and how to make it).
2. 写作指导：
本文为写自己所喜欢的食物的食谱。
因此，时态应用一般现在时态；
应先根据 3b 中的所列的原料清单，说明做此食物所需的原料。
然后，描述一下制作此食物的过程。同学应注意使用 first, next, then, finally 等表示做事情的
次序的副词来使你的描述更加清晰与明确。
3. 学生们根据写作提示，及指导的内容来试着写自己的食谱。
4. Let some Ss read their passage to the class. Give any help if necessary.
Ⅱ. Group work
1. Make up a crazy recipe with your partner.
(You may first make a list of the ingredients and the produce.)
2. Tell another pair of students how to make this crazy food. The other pair will have to draw it.
3. Give Ss some examples:
First, put some yogurt on a piece of bread. Then, cut up one apple, and an onion and
put them on the yogurt ⋯
4. Ss try to write about their own crazy recipe in pairs. Then tell another group.
5. See which recipe is the craziest and which group draws the best.
Ⅲ. Self check
Work on Self check 1
1. Tell Ss the sentences below is about how to make tomato and egg soup.
They are not in the right order. Please read the sentences and put them in the right order first. Then
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
94
complete the instructions with the words in the box.
2. Ss work by themselves the try to number the instructions first.
3. Then put the words first, next, then, finally in the blanks.
4. Check the answers and explain some main points.
理解句意：
将所有的东西搅合在一起然后可以吃了。
煮五分钟后放入两个鸡蛋。
将三个西红柿切碎，并将其放入锅内。
加入一些水、糖和盐。
5. 学生们试着复述制作西红柿鸡蛋汤的过程。
Work on Self check 2
1. Tell Ss to write questions and answers using the words in brackets below.
2. Give Ss some directions:
根据要求可知第一句为疑问句，特殊疑问句的结构为“特殊疑问词 + 一般疑问句？”故应先看
其有没特殊疑问词。
如没有特殊疑问词，则为一般疑问句，则应根据句子的谓语动词来确定将 be 动词还是助动词
放在句首。
3. Let some Ss try to make their own sentences and check the answers.
Ⅳ. Homework
想一想，你在家里最喜欢吃的一道菜。了解一下它的做法，用英语将做这个菜所需的材料以及简单的
过程用英语描述出来。
板书设计：
Section B 2 3a-Self check
3a： have, First, wash, Next, cut, put, Finally, enjoy
3c: one possible version:
We need some pieces of Beijing Duck, sauce and green onion, some
lettuce and some pancake.
First, put the green onion and some sauce on the pancake.
Next, put some pieces of duck on it.
Then role the pancake and eat it.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
95
◇总第 38 课时
Unit 9 Can you come to my party?
Section A 1 (1a-2d)
一、 教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 能掌握以下单词： prepare, prepare for, exam, flu, available, another time, until, hang, hang out, catch
2) 能掌握以下句型：
① — Can you come to my party on Saturday afternoon?
— Sure, I’d love to.
② — Can you go to the movies on Saturday?
— I’m sorry, I’m not available. I have too much homework this weekend.
③ That’s too bad. Maybe another time.
④ Sure. Thanks for asking.
⑤ Sam isn’t leaving until next Wednesday.
2) 能了解以下语法：
用情态动词 can 来表达邀请。
3）学会表达邀请，学会对邀请进行恰当的答复或拒绝。
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
学会人际交往的基本常识，学会有礼貌地邀请别人以及回答别人的邀请的方式。理解“义务”涵
义，学会承担自己应尽的义务，能够在班级以及社会生活中担当一定的责任。理解人与人之间的真情，
学会珍惜朋友之间、师生之间的友情。
二、 教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 运用所学提出邀请，接受邀请和拒绝邀请。
2) 正确使用 can, might, must 等情态动词。
2. 教学难点：
1) 扎实掌握重点词汇和表示邀请的句型并能灵活运用。
2) 通过听力练习和小组合作，理解并能提出邀请并作肯定回答。
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Lead-in
1. 在大屏幕上向学生展示一张邀请函。
T: Hello, everyone! Yesterday I received an invitation letter from my dear friend; she invited me to go to her
Halloween party. But I have something important to do. I ’ m studying for a test. I don ’ t know what to do. What
should I say? Can you help me? ⋯
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
96
2. Ss try to answer the questions.
Ⅱ. Presentation
1. 引导学生们看大屏幕上邀请及两个答语。
Look at the expressions on the screen: “ Sure, I ’ d love to. ” “ I ’ m sorry, I have to ⋯”. Read the expressions to
the class and the students repeat each one.
Say, can you come to my party? Have the S1 give “ yes answers ” and S2 give “ no answers ” then plus a reason.
Ask students to give their own reasons. If necessary, I can give a reason and have the students repeat it.
2. 用汉语向学生说明回答别人邀请时，所作的两种类型的答复。
Ⅲ. Game
1. 学生看大屏幕上的转盘，根据转盘所停止位置的词组来做邀请与应答的游戏。
2. Make a model to the Ss:
e.g. S1: Can you go shopping with me?
S2: Sorry, I can’t. I have to prepare for the math exam.
⋯
3. Ss work in pairs and answer the questions.
Ⅳ. Listening
1. T: Now listen to the recording and write the names next to the correct students in the picture.
2. Play the recording for the first time. Students only listen. Play the recording a second time. Write the name
of each person next to his or her picture.
3. Play the recording again. Check the answers with the Ss.
Ⅴ. Group work
1. Help students form groups of four. Say, one of you is student A. Student A invites the other three students to
your party. The other students say “ yes ”or “ no”. Remember to give a reason.
2. Have the students work in groups.
3. Let some groups ask and answer about their conversations.
Ⅵ. Listening
Work on 2a:
1. Read the sentences in 2a. Tell Ss they will listen to some sentences. They should listen and circle the
words “can” or “can’t” in the bracket.
2. Play the recording for the Ss to listen and circle the words.
3. Play the recording again to check the answers.
Work on 2b:
1. Let Ss read the chart below. Tell Ss, this time they must write the reasons in the chart. Make sure they know
what to do.
2. Play the recording for the Ss to write the reasons in the chart.
3. Play the recording again to check the answers.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
97
Ⅶ. Pair work
1. Tell Ss to look at the reasons in the chart in 2b. Then write some more.
2. Let Ss read conversations in 2c.
3. Ss practice the conversations using the reasons in the chart on the right.
4. Ask some pairs to act out their conversations.
Ⅷ. Role-play
1. Read the conversations and answer the questions:
1) What did they do last fall? _____________________________________
2) What does Nick have to do on Saturday? _____________________________
3) When will they hang out? _____________________________
2. Explain some new words and main points in the conversation.
until, not ⋯until, hang out, catch
3. Read the conversation after the teacher.
4. Practice the conversation with their partner. Then let some pairs act out the conversation.
Homework:
1. Recite the conversation in 2d after school.
2. 假设你将于这个周末过生日，并开一个生日聚会，你约请朋友们参加你的聚会，但有几名同学因故
不能来，请你将与他们的对话用英语编写出来。
板书设计：
Section A 1(1a-2d)
单词： prepare, prepare for, exam, flu, available, another time, until,
hang, hang out, catch
句型：
① — Can you come to my party on Saturday afternoon?
— Sure, I’d love to.
② — Can you go to the movies on Saturday?
— I’m sorry, I’m not available. I have too much homework this
weekend.
③ That’s too bad. Maybe another time.
④ Sure. Thanks for asking.
⑤ Sam isn’t leaving until next Wednesday.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
98
◇总第 39 课时
Section A 2 (Grammar Focus-3c)
一、 教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 学习掌握下列词汇： invite, accept, refuse
2）进行一步复习巩固运用 Section A 部分所学的生词和词组。
3）进一步学习运用所学的知识来表达邀请；学会如何回答别人对自己的邀请，以及学会如何有礼貌地
拒绝他人的邀请，并陈述理由。
4) 掌握情态动词 can, must, have to, might 的用法。
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
学会人际交往的基本常识， 学会有礼貌地邀请别人以及回答别人的邀请的方式。 理解“义务”涵义，
学会承担自己应尽的义务，能够在班级以及社会生活中担当一定的责任。理解人与人之间的真情，学
会珍惜朋友之间、师生之间的友情。
二、 教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 进一步学习运用所学的知识来表达邀请；学会有礼貌地答复他人对自己的邀请。
2) 掌握情态动词 can 来表达邀请；运用情态动词 have to, must, might 等有礼貌地说明拒绝他人邀
请的理由。
2. 教学难点：
1) 能熟练进行邀请及应答。
2) 运用情态动词 have to, must, might 等有礼貌地说明拒绝他人邀请的理由。
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision
1. Have a dictation of the new words learned in the last class.
2. Ask some Ss to invite some Ss to his/her party. The partners give some answers.
S1: Can you come to my party?
S2：Sure. I’d love to.
S3: Sorry, I can’t. I have to look after my sister at home.
S4: ⋯
3. Role-play the conversation in 2d.
Ⅱ. Grammar Focus.
1. 学生阅读 Grammar Focus 中的句子，然后做填空练习。
① ─星期六你能来我的聚会吗？
─____ you _____ to my party on Saturday?
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
99
─当然，我乐意来。 Sure. ____ _____ _____.
─对不起，我必须为数学考试而学习。
Sorry, I _____ _____ _____ a math test.
② ─ 明天晚上你能去看影剧院吗？
─ _____ you ____ to the movie ___________ night?
─当然可以，听起来很棒。
─ ______, that _______ ________.
─ 恐怕不行，我得了流感。
─ I ’ m ______ not. I have the ______.
③ ─ 他能去聚会吗？
─ _____ he ______ to the party？
─ 不能。他必须帮助他的父母亲。
─ No, he ____. He _____ to help his parents.
④ ─ 她能参加棒球比赛吗？
─ ____ she go to the baseball _______?
─ 不，她没有空。她必须去看医生。
─ No, she ’ s _______ ________. She ______ to ____ to the ______.
⑤ ─ 他们能去看电影吗？
─ _____ they____ to the _______ ？
─ 不，他们没有空。他们可能必须去见朋友。
─ No, they ’ re not __________. They _____ ______ ____ meet their ________.
2. 学生们根据记忆，看大屏幕来完成填空练习。
3. 学生们完成填空试题后，可以打开课本检查答案，对错误的句子，单独进行强化记忆。
Ⅲ. Try to Find
如何表达邀请与答复别人的邀请：
1. can 用于表示 “ ____________ ”，如：
汤姆会骑马。 ___________________
2. “ Can you ⋯ ?”表达 “ ______________ ”，
答语：同意用 ____________________.
不同意用 __________________________.
如：恐怕不行，我要去探望我的姑姑。
____________________________________
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
100
◇总第 40 课时
Ⅰ. Practice
Work on 3a:
1. Tell Ss to read the conversation in 3a and try to complete the answers with might and one of the phrases in
the box.
2. 方法指导：
首先，应明确练习的要求。本题要求同学们用情态动词 might 来委婉地表达自己在将来的某个时
间可以有做的事情。
然后，读空格中所给的词组，明确它们的意思。读每个小对话，根据上文语境结合所给的词组，
选择一个恰当的事情来回答。
注意，一定要用上情态动词 might 。 结构： might + 动词词组
3. 最后，教师与同学们一起校对答案，并对学生们有疑问的地方进行解释。
4. 学生们阅读这些对话，并与伙伴一起练习这组小对话。
Work on 3b:
1. 告诉学生们本题的要求：根据括号中所给的提示词来补全问句，并做出恰当地答复。
2. 让学生们重点看答复提示中所要求是“接受”的还是“拒绝”的，并做答复。如果是拒绝，还应根
据括号中的提示词给出一个恰当的理由。
3. 让学生们互相检查自己所写的小对话，发现并改正错误。
4. 让部分学生与自己的伙伴说一说自己所写的小对话。大家一起改正句子中的错误。
Ⅱ. Group work
1. 小组中的同学们每个人都填写一张表格 （见 3c 中表格） 来明确自己近期要做的事情， 选择一个恰当
的时间来开一个聚会。
2. 先由小组长根据自己的安排，邀请你小组里的成员去参加你的聚会，每个小组成员，根据自己表格
上的安排来确定是否参加这个聚会。
3. 然后，其他同学轮流根据自己的安排，邀请你的组里的成员去参加你的聚会，其他成员根据自己表
格上的安排来确定是否参加这个聚会。
4. 最后，看你们小组哪位同学能邀请到最多的同学参加自己的聚会。
Ⅲ. Exercise
If time is enough, do some more exercises on big screen.
选择恰当的答案完成对话：
A: Hey, Bob. 1. ___________
B: I ’ m sorry, I can ’ t. I have to help my parents.
A: 2. ________. How about you, Ling Ling? Can you come to my party?
L: 3. _________
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
101
A: On Saturday afternoon.
L: Oh, no, I can ’ t. 4. ____________
A: That ’ s too bad. 5. _____________.
L: Sure. Thanks for asking.
1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. _____ 5. _____
Homework
1. 复习 Grammar Focus 中的内容。
2. 你的朋友邀请你去看电影，请根据在 3c 中所填写的信息编写一个与你朋友的对话。
A: Can you go to the movie on Saturday evening?
B: Sorry, I can ’ t. I have to ⋯
板书设计
Section A 2Grammar Focus-3c
3a: 1. watch TV; 2. I might practice the violin. 3. I might finish it on the
weekend. 4. I might go with my cousin. 5. I ’m afraid not. I might visit my
grandparents.
3b: 1. Can you play tennis with us? Sure. I ’d love to.
2. Would you like to go to the movies?
I ’m afraid I can ’t. I might have to prepare for the math exam.
3. Can you hang out with us tonight? Sorry. I can ’t. I must help my mom at
home.
4. Would you like to come to my birthday party? Sure. I ’d love to.
A. That ’s too bad. B. Can you come to my party?
C. Are you going shopping with me?
D. Maybe another time. E. I have to study for a test.
F. When is it? G. I ’d love to.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
102
◇总第 41 课时
Section B 1 1a-2e
一、 教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 能掌握以下单词： the day before yesterday, the day after tomorrow, weekday, look after, invitation,
reply, forward, delete, print, sad, goodbye, take a trip, glad, preparation, glue, without, surprised, look forward
to
2) 能掌握以下句型：
① — What’s today？ — It ’s Monday.
② — Can you play tennis with me? — Sorry, I can’t. I ⋯
③ I look forward to hearing from you all.
④ Bring Ms. Steen to the party without telling her so that she can be surprised.
3) 能综合运用 can 来表达邀请。
4）通过阅读邀请函来掌握必要的信息。
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
学会人际交往的基本常识， 学会有礼貌地邀请别人以及回答别人的邀请的方式。 理解“义务”涵义，
学会承担自己应尽的义务，能够在班级以及社会生活中担当一定的责任。理解人与人之间的真情，学
会珍惜朋友之间、师生之间的友情。
二、 教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 掌握本课时出现的生词及表达方式。
2) 进行听力训练，提高综合听说能力。
3）阅读短文，获得相关信息，提高学生们的综合阅读能力。
2. 教学难点
1. 听力训练
2. 阅读 2b 部分的短文并完成相关要求。
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision
1. Daily greeting.
2. 复习表达请求与应答请求。
3. 复习一些常用的委婉地表达拒绝的方式。
4. 让学生们谈谈自己未来两天（ tomorrow 及 the day after tomorrow ）的活动打算。
Ⅱ. Lead-in
1. Ask Ss some questions:
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
103
T: What day is today/tomorrow/the day after tomorrow?
S: It ’ s Tuesday/Wednesday/Thursday.
2. Then sing a song like the song of ABC.
Sunday/Monday /Tuesday/Wednesday/Thursday/Friday/Saturday/
3. T: What was/is the date yesterday/the day before yesterday/ today/tomorrow/the day after tomorrow?
S: 13th/14th/15th ⋯ . Let the students ask these questions one by one.
Explain the new sentence:
“ What’ s today/ tomorrow/the day after tomorrow? ”
“ It ’sMonday./Tuesday./Wednesday. ”
4. Show the days of the week in a large monthly calendar.
Point out the days of the week at the top of the calendar and ask a student to read these words aloud.
Ask a student to point out today ’ s date,tomorrow ’ s date,the day after tomorrow ’ s date and yesterday ’ s
date. Complete activity 1a, check the answers.
Ask students to write the words today, tomorrow, yesterday and the day after tomorrow in the correct
spaces on the calendars in their books.
Ⅲ. Discussion
1. Work with your partners. Look at the chart in 1a. Then ask and answer with a partner.
S1: What’s today?
S2: It ’s Monday, the 14th.
Ⅳ. Listening
Work on 1c:
1. Tell Ss to listen to Vince and Andy ’s conversation. Then circle Yes or No.
2. Play the recording for the Ss. Ss just listen for the first time. Play the recording again and circle.
3. Play the recording and check the answers with the Ss.
Work on 1d:
1. T: Now please read Vince ’s activities in 1d. Tell Ss they'll listen to the tape again. Then try to match Vince ’s
activities with the days in 1d.
听力指导： 通过事先读表格中的内容， 可以看出， 本听力重点要求我们听清每个活动的时间安排，
因此我们在听时应重点听句子中的活动及其时间。并将时间与活动内容相连。
2. Ss listen to the recording carefully and try to match Vince ’s activities with the days.
3. Play the recording again and check the answers with the class.
Ⅴ. Pair work
Work on 2a:
1. Work in pairs. One is Andy and the other is Vince. Andy, invite Vince to play tennis.
2. Ask some pairs to read the conversation first.
3. Ask Ss to practice the conversations in pairs.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
104
4. Ask some pairs act out their conversation.
Work on 2b:
Make a list of kinds of parties people have.
Ss discuss the parties they know. And write them down on their books.
Ⅵ. Reading
1. T: Did you have a surprise party for sb.? Who is it? Why do you have a party for him/her?
2. Let Ss read the passage quickly. Why did the people write them? Match the reason with each message
below.
3. Ss read the passage quickly and match the reasons with each message.
4. Check the answers with the Ss.
Ⅶ. Reading
1. T: Now let ’s work on 2c. This time you should read the passage a little more carefully. Then answer the
questions.
2. 方法指导：首先，阅读试题的内容，明确问题的意思，然后，带着这五个问题再次认真阅读短文的
内容，并在相关段落中认真查找相关问题的答案。根据相关提示完成问题。
3. Ss read carefully and try to answer the questions.
4. Check the answers with the class.
Ⅷ. Reading
Work on 2d.
1. T: Now let ’s work on 2d. Nowadays, it ’s very popular to have a house warming party when someone moves
into his/her new house. The passage below is a invitation of a housewarming party. Read the invitation and
complete the blanks with the words and phrases from the message on Page 69.
2. 方法指导：
首先，通读全文可知，短文是邀请朋友来参加聚会。 通读本段文字，掌握大意。重点把握有空格
句子的意思，分析空格处的意思。
然后，根据记忆用 2b 短文中的词汇来填空，补全这篇短文。
最后，再阅读一遍短文，并检查所填内容的正确性。
3. Let some Ss write their answers on the blackboard.
4. Check the answers with the Ss.
Work on 2e:
1. T: Imagine one of your favorite teachers is leaving. Plan a party for him/her. Answer the questions with a
partner.
2. Ss discuss the questions with a partner. Then answer the questions.
3. Let some pairs answer the questions.
4. Correct the mistakes they made.
Homework
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
105
1. 课后阅读短文，试着复述课文，总结课文出现的重难点词组及表达方式。
2. 完成 2e 中的任务，并将问答句写在作业本上。
板书设计：
Section B 1 1a-2e
单词： the day before yesterday, the day after tomorrow, weekday, look after,
invitation, reply, forward, delete, print, sad, goodbye, take a trip, glad,
preparation, glad, without, surprised, look forward to
句型：
① —What’s today？ —It ’s Monday the 14th.
② —Can you play tennis with me? —Sorry, I can’t. I ⋯
③ I look forward to hearing from you all.
④ Bring Ms. Steen to the party without telling her so that she can be surprised.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
106
◇总第 42 课时
Section B 2 3a-Self Check
一、 教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 掌握下列生词 : daytime, concert, headmaster, event, guest, calendar
2) 复习邀请信的表达方式，阅读相关邀请信并能获得相关信息，回答相关问题。
3）能够综合运用所掌握的知识并根据相关提示来完成写一个简单的邀请信的任务。
4) 通过写一个邀请信及答复伙伴的邀请信，达到综合运用所学知识的目的。
5）复习本单元所学的重难点内容，及时巩固提高。
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
学会人际交往的基本常识，学会有礼貌地邀请别人以及回答别人的邀请的方式。理解“义务”涵
义，学会承担自己应尽的义务，能够在班级以及社会生活中担当一定的责任。理解人与人之间的真情，
学会珍惜朋友之间、师生之间的友情。
二、 教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 复习邀请信的表达方式，阅读相关邀请信并能获得相关信息，回答相关问题。
2）能够综合运用所掌握的知识并根据相关提示来完成写一个简单的邀请信的任务。
3）复习本单元所学的重点知识点，并完成相关复习任务。
2. 教学难点：
通过写一个邀请信及答复伙伴的邀请信，达到综合运用所学知识的目的。
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision
1. Have a dictation of the new words and expressions.
2. Review the main phrases learned yesterday.
(1) 将⋯⋯带到⋯⋯
(2) 去旅行
(3) 想起
(4)（在）不做某事（的情况下）
(5) 以便于；以至于
(6) 期望；盼望
(7) 一个令人吃惊的聚会
(8) 收到某人的信
3. Talk about David ’s party and complete the blanks in the big screen.
(短文内容见大屏幕 )
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
107
Ⅱ. Lead-in
1. Ask Ss what an opening party is. And ask them if they have come to an opening party.
S1: I know. When a building is put into use, people often have a ceremony to celebrate it. It ’s an opening. Last
year, our new school is put into use. We had a great opening.
Ⅲ. Reading
1. T: Now let ’s work on 3a:
A new school library is put into use. They ’ll have a great opening. The headmaster writes many invitations to
the parents of their school. Now read the invitations below and answer the questions.
2. 阅读指导：
首先，快速阅读短文，整体把握短文大意。
其次，阅读后面的七个问题，明确问题的意思。带着这七个问题再去仔细阅读邀请信，在短文的相关
位置找到这些问题的答案依据，并写出正确的答案。
最后，再通读一遍短文，结合短文内容看所回答的问题有无错误或不周全的地方。
3. Ss try to read the article and try to fill in the blanks.
4. Check the answers with the Ss.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
108
◇总第 43 课时
Ⅰ. Writing
Work on 3b:
1. Think about a party or any other event you know. Write an invitation to your friends to come to your party
or event.
2. Let some Ss read the information in the chart.
3. Ss try to think about their parities or events. Write an invitation using the information in the chart.
4. Read their invitations and check if there are mistakes.
5. Exchange your invitations with a partner. Then write a reply to his or her invitation.
If you can ’t come to his/her invitation, you should write some proper reasons.
6. Ss try to write down their invitations.
7. Let some Ss read their passage to the class.
Ⅱ. Pair work
1. Read the calendar in 4. Make sure Ss know the activities in each day.
2. Tell Ss how to do it. Sa, look at your calendar on the right. Sb, look at yours on Page 81. Find a time you
can both go shopping.
3. Make a model to the Ss:
Sa: Can you go shopping with me next week?
Sb: Sure. I’d love to. When?
Sa: Well, what are you going to do on Monday evening?
Sb: I must study for the English test. What about Tuesday evening.
4. Ss ask and answer the activities they will in each day. Then make a decision when to go shopping together.
5. At last, let some Ss ask and answer questions.
Ⅲ. Self Check
Work on Self Check 1:
1. Fill in the blanks in the conversation.
2. Let Ss read the conversation first and try fill in the blanks.
3. 引导学生们复习如何写邀请信及如何答复邀请。
4. Check the answers with the Ss.
5. Explain how to do it.
e.g. 1. Can; 2. on; 句意“你好，彼特。你在周末能来参加我的聚会吗？” 第一空用情态动词 can 表达
请求；第二空后有时间 the weekend,故用介词 on 来表示这一具体时间。
其他类似。
Work on Self check 2
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
109
1. Tell Ss how to do this task.
T: You get these invitations but you can ’t go. Write a refusal and a reason.
2. Do the first one for the Ss as a model:
(1. I ’ m afraid I can ’ t. I have to prepare for the math exam.)
3. Ss try to complete the conversations.
4. Check the answers with the class.
Homework
1. Review Section B.
2.根据第 4 部分中表格中的内容，编写一个邀请你的朋友参加你的一个聚会的对话。
板书设计：
Section B 2 3a-Self Check
3a：
1. Larry Smith.
2. It ’s for the opening of the new library at No. 9 High School.
3. It will be on the morning of Wednesday, January 8th at 9:00.
4. They can enjoy the school concert.
5. They should dress neatly.
6. Yes. They should bring one book as a gift for the new library.
7. They should write to this invitation by Friday.
3c: one possible version: （见大屏幕）
Self check 1: Can; on; I’d; you; can’t; have; Can; might; I’ll
Self check 2:
1) I ’m afraid I can ’t. I have to prepare for the math exam.
2) Sorry, I can ’t. I have to look after my sister at home.
3) I ’d love to. But I ’m not available. I ’ll visit my grandparents with my family.
4) I ’m afraid not. I have to go to the dentist.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
110
◇总第 44 课时
Unit 10 If you go to the party, you ’ ll have a great time!
Section A1 (1a-2d)
一、 教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 能掌握以下单词： meeting, video, organize, potato chips, chocolate, upset, taxi, advice
能掌握以下句型：
① ─I think I ’ll go to the party with Karen and Anna.
─ If you go to the party, you ’ ll have a great time!
② ─What will happen if they have the party today?
─ Half the class won ’ t come.
2) 能了解以下语法：
掌握含 if 条件状语从句的主从复合句的用法。
3) 能用 if 引导的条件状语从句作出假设，用 will 谈论结果。
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
学习因果关系的表达和做出合理的建议。谈论自己的感受，同时使学生在英语交流中注意并观察
他人的情感。由于本单元话题贴近学生生活，符合他们热爱休闲的心理，可以提高他们学习英语的兴
趣，积极参与英语实践活动。
二、 教学重难点
1. 教学重点、难点：
（1）重点句型： —I think I ’m going to go to the party with Karen and Ann.
— If you do, you ’ ll have a great time.
（2）正确使用 if 引导的条件状语从句
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Lead-in
Ask some questions.
T: If you are happy, what will you do?
S: If I am happy, I will smile.
T: If you become sad, what will you do?
S: If I become sad, I will cry.
T: What will happen if you are going to do too much work?
S: If I am going to do too much work, I will get tired.
Ⅱ. Presentation
1．Show some pictures to present new structure:
If it is sunny this Sunday, I ’ ll go fishing.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
111
Ask several students:
What will you do if it is sunny this Sunday?
If I have much money, I will buy a big house.
What will you do if you have much money?
Practice with the students:
2．Show some pictures to present the following:
(1) I think I ’ m going to stay at home.
If you do, you ’ ll be bored.
(2) I think I ’ m going to work until night.
If you do, you ’ ll be tired.
(3) I think I ’ m going to exercise.
If you do, you ’ ll be healthy.
(4) If you go to the party, you ’ ll have a great time.
(5) If you watch TV every night, your parents will be mad at you.
3. Work on 1a, match the statements with the pictures [a-d].
Ⅲ. Game
1. Show some pictures in the big screen. Let Ss ask and answer like this:
A: What are you going to do ⋯?
B: I think I ’ m going to ⋯.
A: If you do, you ’ ll be ⋯
Ⅳ. Listening
Work on 1c:
1. Point out the statements and the responses in activity 1a. Tell Ss to listen to the recordings and complete the
responses.
2. Play the recording for the first time, Ss only listen.
3. Play the recording again the try to complete the responses.
4. Check the answers.
Ⅴ. Pair work
1. Let Ss read the model with a partner.
2. Look at the pictures above. Use the information in 1b. Ask and answer with a partner.
3. Let some pairs ask and answer about the pictures.
Ⅵ. Listening
Work on 2a:
1. Let Ss read the two sentences below. Make sure they know what to do.
2. Play the recording for the Ss to listen and circle the right answers.
3. Play the recording again to check the answers.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
112
Work on 2b:
1. Let Ss read the phrases and questions below. Tell Ss that they should answer the questions with the proper
phrases.
2. Play the recording for the Ss to write the correct answers.
3. Play the recording again to check the answers.
Ⅶ. Pair work
1. Tell Ss role-play a conversation between Nelly and Mark.
2. Give a model to the Ss.
3. Ss work in pairs and practice the conversation.
4. Ask some pairs to act out their conversations.
Ⅷ. Role-play
1. Read the conversations and answer the questions below.
(1) What will happen if we ask people to bring food?
___________________________________
(2) What will happen if we give people some small gifts if they win?
____________________________________
2. Explain some new words and main points in the conversation.
3. Let Ss read the conversation after the teacher.
4. Practice the conversation with their partner. Then let some pairs to act out the conversation.
Homework:
1. Recite the conversation in 2d after school.
2. 用括号里所给词的适当形式补全句子。
(1) If she stops smoking, _______________. (be more healthy)
(2) If it rains, ____________. (stay at home)
(3) If I go on a diet, ___________. (lose weight)
(4) If we get up early, ________________. (go out for the day)
(5) If he gets a job, _____________. (earn lots of money)
板书设计：
Section A (1a-2d)
New Words:
meeting, video, organize, potato chips, chocolate, upset, taxi, advice
能掌握以下句型：
① ─I think I ’ll go to the party with Karen and Anna.
─If you go to the party, you’ll have a great time!
② ─What will happen if they have the party today?
─Half the class won’t come.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
113
◇总第 45 课时
Section A2 (Grammar Focus-3c)
一、 教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 学习掌握下列词汇： upset, taxi, advice
2）进行一步复习巩固学习 Section A 部分所学的生词和词组。
3）掌握正确用含 if 条件状语从句的主从句。
4) 能够熟练运用所学的知识，用 if 来表达条件，用 will 来表达结果。
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
学习因果关系的表达和做出合理的建议。谈论自己的感受，同时使学生在英语交流中注意并观察
他人的情感。由于本单元话题贴近学生生活，符合他们热爱休闲的心理，可以提高他们学习英语的兴
趣，积极参与英语实践活动。
二、 教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 复习巩固 Section A 部分所学的生词和词组，达到熟练运用的目标。
2) 能够熟练运用所学的知识，用 if 来表达条件，用 will 来表达结果。
2. 教学难点：
1) 掌握正确用含 if 条件状语从句的主从句。
2) 能够熟练运用所学的知识，用 if 来表达条件，用 will 来表达结果。
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision
1. Have a dictation of the new words learned in the last class.
2. Talking:
Let ’ s look at the pictures in 1a and let Ss make sentences with “ if ⋯ will ” .
e.g. If you go to the party with Karen and Anna, you ’ ll have a good time.
One by one, let some Ss make a sentences by themselves.
3. Game:
Tell Ss “ If you have a lot of money, what will do? ”
Ss think and tell the class what they will do.
Judge who is the best.
4. Role-play the conversation in 2d.
Ⅱ. Grammar Focus
1. 学生阅读 Grammar Focus 中的句子，然后做填空练习。
① 我想我将会乘公交车去参加聚会。
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
114
I _____ I ’ ll take the bus to the ______.
② 如果你那样做，你将会迟到。
If you ______ ，_____ be late.
③ 我想我将待在家里。
I _____ _______ stay at home.
④ 如果你那样做，你将会很伤感。
If you ____, ______ ____ sorry.
⑤ 如果他们今天开聚会，将会发生什么事？
____, ____ _______ if they _____ the party today?
⑥ 如果他们今天开，班里一半的学生将不会去。
If they ______ it today, ______ the class _______ come.
⑦ 我们应当要求人们带食物来吗？
Should we ______ people to ______ food?
⑧ 如果我们要求人们带食物来时，他们将会仅带薯条和巧克力。
______we ______ people to bring food, ________ just ______ potato chips and chocolate.
2. 学生们根据记忆，看大屏幕来完成填空练习。
3. 学生们完成填空试题后，可以打开课本检查答案，对错误的句子，单独进行强化记忆。
Ⅲ. Try to Find
一、含 if 条件状语从句的主从复合句
1. If 条件状语从句中，主句用一般将来时，从句用 __________表示将来。 ________原则
例如： We will go to the park if it _______ ______ (rain) tomorrow.
2. if 条件状语从句中，如果主句有 must，can，may 等情态动词，从句用 __________。
You must stop if the traffic light ____(be) red.
3. If 条件状语从句中，主句是祈使句，从句用 ____________表示将来。 ________原则
例如： Don’ t wait for me if I_____(be) late.
练一练：
① Put up your hands if you _____ (have) any questions.
② If it____ (be) cold tomorrow, I will wear my sweater.
③ He can go home if he ______ (finish) his homework.
二、 Game:
Boys and girls have a competition:
在大屏幕上给出条件与结果，让男生、女生进行比赛，来比赛。
先给出一个例子，然后进行六个小题的比赛，看哪一方能得胜。
Ⅳ. Practice
Work on 3a:
1. Ss skim the passage first. Try to know the meaning of the passage.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
115
Then Ss read the passage carefully again and try to fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the verbs in the
brackets.
2. 方法指导：
① know; do 句意 “我不知道明晚参加迈克的生日聚会的事怎么做？ ”don’t 后跟动词原形； what to +
动词形式 ，复合不定式结构。
② think; 本句表达一客观事实，主语 parents 是复数形式，故一般现在时态。句意 “我父母认为我应当
为下周的英语考试而学习 ”
③ go; will be; 本句是含 if 条件状语从句的主从复合句；应遵循主将从现原则。句意 “如果我去参加聚
会，他们会很失望。 ”
④ tells; have; 本句为 but 连接的一并列句，后半句为一般现在时，故前半句也应是一般现在时，主语
Mike 是第三人称单数形式，故填 tells；don’t后跟动词原形。
⑤ wear; will look; 本句为含 if 条件状语从句的主从复合句，应循主将从现原则。句意 “如果我穿牛仔，
我会看起来很糟糕。 ”
⑥ go; how to + 动词原形 表示 “如何做某事 ”，是复合不定式结构。
walk; will take; 本句为含 if 条件状语从句的主从复合句，应循主将从现原则。句意 “如果我步行去，将
会花费我很多时间。 ”
⑦ take; will be; 本句为含 if 条件状语从句的主从复合句， 应循主将从现原则。 句意 “如果我乘出租车去，
又将会很贵。 ” 。
3. 最后，学生们再次阅读短文一遍，进行深入理解。
Work on 3b:
1. 让学生们阅读所给的条件或结果，整体把握对话的意思。
2. 然后根据自己的生活经验，想一个结果或条件。表达结果时用 will + 动词原形；表达条件时用 if 条
件句，注意谓语动词用一般现在时态。
3. 让学生们相互问答这些问题。 并查对他们句子中的错误。
Ⅴ. Group work
1. Make a story in group.
2. Write a story with your group on a piece of paper. The first person begi ns with story with “ I think I will ⋯ . ”
The others add sentences with “ if ” , Pass the paper around twice. Then read the story.
3. Make sure Ss know what to do.
4. 学生们合作每个同学用 “ I think I will ⋯ If I ⋯ , I will ⋯” 来写一个句子。然后，小组同学们将他们
所写的句子放在一起，构成一个句子。
(最后，可以经学生们评议来推举那个小组的故事是最好的。 ）
Ⅵ. Exercises
用动词的适当形式填空。
1．If she ______ (finish ) work early, she ______(go) home.
2．If the weather _____(be) fine ，we _____ (go)for a walk .
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
116
3. If I_____(have) time tonight, I _____ (finish) the book I ’ m reading.
4. If it_____ (rain) next weekend, we_____ (not be able to ) plant the vegetable .
5. If it_____(rain), we______(stay)at home
6. If she______(arrive), she _____(phone) me .
Homework
1. 复习 Grammar Focus 中的内容。
2. 将 3c 的短文，再完整地写一遍。
板书设计
Section A Grammar Focus-3c
3a: 1. know, do, think, go, will be, tells, have, wear, will look, go, walk,
will take, take, will be
3b: 1. I ’ ll be late for school.
2. My parents will be upset.
3. I ’ ll become very heavy.
4. I play chess after school every day.
5. I don ’ t go to my friends ’ parties.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
117
◇总第 46 课时
Section B1 1a-2e
一、 教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 能掌握以下单词： travel, agent, expert, keep ⋯ to oneself, themselves, teenager, normal, unless,
certainly, wallet, worried, mile, angry, in the end, understanding, careless, mistake, himself, careful, advise,
solve, step, trust, experience, in half, halfway
2) 能掌握以下句式结构：
① ─What do you think I should do? Can you give some advice?
─ I think I should go to college.
② But If I go to college, I ’ll never become a great soccer player.
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
学习因果关系的表达和做出合理的建议。谈论自己的感受， 同时使学生在英语交流中注意并观察他
人的情感。由于本单元话题贴近学生生活，符合他们热爱休闲的心理，可以提高他们学习英语的兴趣，
积极参与英语实践活动。
二、 教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 掌握本课时出现的生词及表达方式。
2) 进行听力训练，提高综合听说能力。
3） 阅读短文，获得相关信息，提高学生们的综合阅读能力。
2. 教学难点
1. 听力训练
2. 阅读 2b 部分的短文并完成相关要求。
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision
1. Daily greeting. Check the homework.
2. 头脑风暴：
Show a picture of “ a lot of money ” .
Ask Ss “ What will you do if you have a lot of money? ” , Let Ss think and give their answers one by one.
S1: If I have a lot of money, I ’ ll buy a big house for my parents.
S2: If I ha ve a lot of money, I ’ ll build a new road for my village.
S3: If I have a lot of money, I ’ ll build a new school for our town.
⋯
学生们进行评比，看谁的想法最好。
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
118
3. 选词填空。
1） If you walk there, you ’ll be late for the _______.
2）If they watch a _______ at the party, some students will be bored.
3） I don ’ t know what to do, can you give me some ________?
4）What will happen if she _______ a soccer game on Saturday?
5） If she doesn ’ t come home on time, her parents will be ________.
6） If it rains tomorrow, we’ ll take a _______ there.
7） If he eats too much ________, he ’ ll be very heavy.
Ⅱ. Presentation
1. Say, Money is very important! But money is not everything.
be happy; travel around the world; go to college; be famous, get an education ⋯
Ⅲ. Talking
1. What is the most important thing to you?
be happy
go to college
Be famous
Travel around the world
Make a lot of money
Get an education
3. Let Ss ask and answer in pairs.
Ⅳ. Listening
Work on 1b:
1. Tell Ss to listen and look at the li st in 1a. Put an “ A” before each thing the soccer agent talks about and a
“ P” before each thing Michael ’ s parents talk about.
3. Play the recording for the Ss to listen and write.
4. Check the answers:
Work on 1c:
1. T: Now please read the sentences in 1c. Try to understand the “ if ” clause or the “ will ” sentences.
听力指导：
本题要求是补全 if 条件句后面的 will 主句，因此应将重点放在听含 “ will ”的主句上。
特别是要听清句子的前两个单词。
2. Ss listen to the recording carefully and try to choose the right answers.
3. Play the recording again and check the answers with the class.
meeting, video, chocolate, taxi,
upset, advice, organize
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
119
4. Show the tape scripts to the Ss on the big screen.
Ⅴ. Pair work
Work on 1c:
1. Work in pairs. Student A is Michael, Student B is his friend. Student B gives student A advice.
2. Ask two students to read the conversations to the class.
3. Ss work in pairs. Ask and answer the questions in pairs.
Work on 2a.
1. T: What kinds of things do you worry about? Who do you usually go to for help?
Now ask and answer the questions with a partner.
2. Let some pairs ask and answer their questions. See what kind of worries they have.
Ⅵ. Reading
1. T: Read the three statements below and then skim the passage. Which statement expresses the main idea
of the passage?
2. Let Ss read the passage quickly and try to find the right statement.
指导：
先分析句意： a. 如果人们有问题，他们应当向专家求建议。
b. 如果人们有问题，他们应当努力保守秘密。
c. 如果人们有问题，他们应当向别人诉说。
3. Check the answers with the Ss.
Ⅶ. Reading
1. T: Now let ’ s work on 2c.
First, let ’ s read the questions and make sure we know the meanings of all the questions. Then read the passage
again and try to answer the questions.
2. 方法指导：首先，应读懂五个问题的意思；然后，带着这五个问题再次认真阅读短文的内容，特别
是认真阅读短文中与某问题相关的部分，以便根据上下文意及整个段落的意思来确定如何回答这个问
题。 综合上下文的意思，确定最贴切的答案。
3. Ss read carefully and try to find the answers to the questions.
4. Check the answers with the class.
Ⅷ. Reading
1. T: Now let ’ s read the short passage and the phrases in 2d. Fill in the blanks with the phrases in the box. If
you don ’ t sure about what to fill. You can go through the passage in 2d.
2. 方法指导：首先，通读这六个词组的意思；然后，再读这篇小短文的意思，根据自己的印象，用方
框时里的单词填空；认真理解每个空格处的意思，填上正确的答案。
3. Ss try to fill in the blanks with the right forms. Check the answers.
Ⅸ. Discussion
1. T: Now read the questions below. Make sure you know the meaning of the questions.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
120
2. Ask three students the following questions. Take notes of their answers.
3. Make a list of questions in your group.
Homework
1. 课后阅读短文，试着复述课文，总结课文出现的重难点词组及表达方式。
2. 课下再根据 2e 部分的内容； 写一个调查报告， 表述自己小组同学的困难及他们经常处理困难的方式。
板书设计：
Section B 1a-2e
New words:
travel, agent, expert, keep ⋯to oneself, themselves, teenager, normal, unless, certainly,
wallet, worried, mile, angry, in the end, understanding, careless, mistake, himself, careful,
advise, solve, step, trust, experience, in half, halfway
2) 能掌握以下句式结构：
① ─ What do you think I should do? Can you give some advice?
─ I think I should go to college.
② But If I go to college, I ’ll never become a great soccer player.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
121
◇总第 47 课时
Section B2 3a-Self Check
一、 教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 复习讨论自己及伙伴们所有的问题，并能通过讨论来找到解决问题的办法。
2) 能够综合运用所学的知识以及根据所给的提示词来完成描述他人的问题及解决办法 的小短文。
3) 能够综合运用所学的知识来描述他人的问题及解决办法 的小短文。
4）通过完成 Self check 的中练习题来全面复习本单元的重难点知识点。
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
学习因果关系的表达和做出合理的建议。谈论自己的感受，同时使学生在英语交流中注意并观察
他人的情感。由于本单元话题贴近学生生活，符合他们热爱休闲的心理，可以提高他们学习英语的兴
趣，积极参与英语实践活动。
二、 教学重难点
1）能够综合运用所学的知识来描述他人的问题及解决办法 的小短文。
2）通过完成 Self check 的中练习题来全面复习本单元的重难点知识点。
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Warming up and revision
1. Have a dictation of the new words and expressions.
2. 将下列词组翻译成英语
1) 有许多担忧 ________________________
2) 与某人交谈 ________________________
3) 害怕做某事 _____________________
4) 最终 ____________
5) 生气 ___________
6) 犯一些粗心的错误 _____________
7) 分享我的问题 _____________________
8) 逃避问题 ___________________
9) 将⋯⋯ 分成两半 _______________
10) 有时候他们在学业上出现问题。 _________________________________
11) 在生活中，有困难和担忧是正常的事。 _____________________________
12) 如果不向别人谈一谈，我们肯定会觉得更糟。 ___________________________
13) 罗伯特就一些寻常的问题向学生们提了建议。 _______________________________
3. Check the answers with the Ss.
4. Let some Ss to read their report of their students ’ problems.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
122
Ⅱ. Lead-in
1. T: (Tell Ss one of your problems) e.g.
I don ’ t have many friends? What do you think I should do? Can you give me some advice?
Let some Ss give you some advice.
2. Show some pictures of different kind of “ problem ” .
Ⅲ. Discussing
Let Ss discuss what kind of problem they usually have in their group. Make a list of them. Then think of the
possible solutions. Make a list of them, too.
1. Each student chooses his or her three biggest worries (they think). Write them down on a piece of paper.
2. Let some Ss read their worries.
Ⅳ. Writing
1. Tell Ss to work on 3b. First, read the structures below to plan your writing.
2. 写作指导：
首先，阅读所给的提示，掌握其大意，从整体上把握短文大意。
其次，从上面所记的三个担忧中选择一个，运用所掌握的句子结构来完成。
最后，将你朋友的名字及问题填写上，并进一步说明问题的解决办法，最后，完整地读一遍短文，看
是否通顺。
3. Let some Ss read their passages and try to find if there are any mistakes?
Give Ss one possible version:
My friend Jenny has a problem. She is too heavy. I think she should eat less junk food and eat more
vegetables and fruit. I think she also should get more exercise. If she eats more vegetables and fruit she
will eat less junk food. If she gets more exercise, she ’ ll be much thinner soon.
Work on 3c:
1. Tell Ss to write about the other two worries. Use the structures in 3b to write a short passage.
2. Ss work by themselves and try to write a short article.
3. Ss try to write a short article with the worries in3a and the structures in 3b.
写作指导：
本文为写某位朋友的问题及解决办法。
因此， 时态应用一般现在时态， 恰当用情态动词及含 if 条件状语从句的主从复合句来表达条
件及结果。
可根据 3b 中的句式结构来，将 3a 中提到的其他两个担忧写出来。
最后， 阅读一遍自己所写的短文， 并与同位或小组其他成员交换检查自己短文中出现的错误。
4. Let some Ss read their passage to the class. Give any help if necessary.
Ⅴ. Group work
1. Talk about the Project in your scho ol “ We Can Help! ”
2. Make sure Ss know what they should do.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
123
(Our school is taking part in the project “We Can Help! ” . Add more items to the poster. Then talk about what
you will do if you take part in the project. )
3. Give Ss an example:
Old people ’s home visit.
A: What will you do if you visit an old people ’ s home?
B: If I help with that, I ’ ll bring the old people some flowers.
4. Let some other Ss give their advice.
e.g.
S1: If I help with that, I ’ ll sing and dance for them to make them happy.
S2: If I help with that, I ’ ll ⋯
Ⅵ. Self check
Work on Self check 1
1. Tell Ss to fill in the blanks with the words in the box.
提示： 正确理解句子上下文的语境，根据语境来填上一个正确的地点或活动。
2. Ss work by themselves the try to fill in the blanks.
3. Check the answers and explain some main points. e.g.
理解句意：
如果我的家庭迁入一个新居所，我会邀请你们都来参加聚会。
如果我买到票，你会和我一起去看电影吗？
如果学校举办音乐会，我将会弹奏吉它。
如果我被邀请，我将去参加艾米的聚会。
Work on Self check 2
1. Tell Ss to fill in the blanks with the words in the blanks.
2. Give Ss some directions:
通读对话一遍，理解对话的大意，明确空格中词汇的意思。
认真阅读每一句话，分析空格处的意思，根据上下文语境确定空格处应填的词汇。
3. Let Ss try to complete the conversation with the words in the box.
4. Check the answers.
Work on Self check 3
1. Tell Ss what they should do.
2. Ss work with their partners complete the sentences in the blanks.
3. Give Ss an example:
What will you do if it rains all weekend?
I will chat with my friends on line and play computer games at home.
4. Let some Ss read their sentences.
Homework
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
124
1. Review Section B.
2. Write a letter to me. If yo u go to the party, what will happen? If you don ’ t go to the party, what will
happen?
板书设计：
Section B 3a-Self check
3 b: one possible version:
My friend Jenny has a problem. She is too heavy. I think she should eat less junk food
and eat more vegetables and fruit. I think she also should get more exercise. If she eats
more vegetables and fruit she will eat less junk food. If she gets more exercise, she ’ ll be
much thinner soon.
self check 1: 1. apartment; 2. movie; 3. school; 4. party
self check 2: Are, going; want; if, will; fight; sorry; will
self check 3: e.g. I will chat with my friends on line and play computer games at home.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
125
◇总第 48 课时
Unit 1 Where did you go on vacation 复习
一．需要掌握的短语
去度假 go on vacation 待在家里 stay at home
去爬山 go to the mountains 去海滩 go to the beach
参观博物馆 visit museums 去夏令营 go to summer camp
相当多 quite a few 为⋯⋯ 而学习 study for
出去 go out 大部分时间 most of the time
尝起来很好吃 taste good 玩得高兴 have a good time
当然 of course 给⋯的感觉；感受到 feel like
去购物 go shopping 想要做某事 feel like doing sth.
在过去 in the past 四处走走 walk around
因为 because of 一碗 ⋯⋯ one bowl of ⋯
第二天 the next day 喝茶 drink tea
找出；查明 find out 继续 go on （doing）
照相 take photos 重要的事 something important
上上下下 up and down 出来 come up
为某人买某物 buy sth. for sb. / buy sb.
sth
除了 ⋯外什么都没有 nothing to do but do sth.
到达某地 arrive in / at 决定去做某事 decide to do sth.
尝试做某事 try doing sth. 尽力去做某事 try to do sth.
忘记做过某事 forget doing sth 忘记做某事 forget to do sth.
喜欢做某事 enjoy doing sth. 想去做某事 want to do sth.
开始做某事 start doing sth. 停止做某事 stop doing sth.
不喜欢做某事 dislike doing sth. 继续做某事 keep doing sth.
为什么不做 ⋯⋯ 呢？ Why not do. sth.? 如此 ⋯⋯ 以至于 ⋯⋯ so+adj.+that+ 从句
告诉某人（不要）做
某事 tell sb. (not) to do sth.
二．需要掌握的句型
1. 你去哪儿度假？我去了山里 .
Where did you go on vacation?I went to the
mountains.
2. 好久未见。 Long time no see.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
126
3. 你去了一些有趣的地方吗？ Did you go anywhere interesting?
4. 我们在那拍了不少照片。 We took quite a few photos there.
5. 我大部分时间只呆在家里看书和放松。
I just stayed at home most of the time to read and
relax.
6. 那是我第一次去那， 所以一切都确实有趣。
It was my first time there, so everything was really
interesting.
7. 我和家人去了乡下一个朋友的农场。
I went to a friend ’s farm in the countryside with my
family.
8. 晚上没什么事可做只有看书。
There was nothing much to do in the evening but
read.
9. 似乎没有人乏味。 No one seemed to be bored.
10. 我们决定去我们旅馆附近的沙滩。 We decided to go the beach near our hotel.
11. 我感觉我像是只鸟。 I felt like I was a bird.
12. 我们看见了 100 多年前中国商人的房子。
We saw the houses of the Chinese traders from 100
years ago.
13. 我想要知道过去这儿的生活是什么样的。 I wonder what life like here in the past.
14. 我真的很喜欢在城镇里散步。 I really enjoyed walking around the town.
15. 一天有多么大的变化呀！ What a difference a day makes!
16. 但接着天开始下了点雨， 所以我们决定乘
火车。
But then it started raining a little so we decided to
take the train.
17. 我们等火车等了一个多小时， 因为那儿有
太多的人。
We waited over an hour for the train because there
were too many people.
18. 由于糟糕的天气，我们看不见下面的东
西。
Because of the bad weather, we couldn’t see
anything below.
19. 我父亲没有带足够的钱， 所以我们只吃了
一碗米饭。
My father didn ’t bring enough money, so we only
had on bowl of rice.
20. 沿途中我们见到许多特殊的花。 We saw lots of special flowers along the way.
21. 我的同学让我继续走，所以我坚持着。 My classmates told me to keep going, so I went on.
22. 每个人都兴奋地跳上跳下。 Everyone jumped up and down in excitement.
23. 20 分钟后，太阳开始出现了。 Twenty minutes later, the sun started to come up.
24. 它是那么的漂亮， 以至于我们忘了过去的
五个小时。
It was so beautiful that we forgot about the last five
hours!
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
127
◇总第 49 课时
Unit 2 How often do you exercise?
一．需要掌握的短语
帮助做家务 help with housework 在周末 on weekends
多久一次 how often 几乎从不 hardly ever
每周一次 once a week 每月两次 twice a month
每天 every day 有空 be free
去看电影 go to the movies 用互联网 use the Internet
摇摆舞 swing dance 打网球 play tennis
熬夜；睡得很晚 stay up late 至少 at least
上舞蹈课和钢琴课 have dance and piano
lessons
早点睡觉 go to bed early
进行体育活动 play sports 对 ⋯⋯ 有好处 be good for
去野营 go camping 一点儿也不 ⋯⋯ not⋯at all
在某人的业余时间 in one’s free time 最受欢迎的 the most popular
比如；诸如 such as 积习难改 old habits die hard
去看牙医 go to the dentist 多于；超过 morn than
少于 less than be smart about sth. 对某事很精明
帮助某人做某事 help sb. with sth. 向某人询问某事 ask sb. about sth.
通过做某事 by doing sth 做某事的最好方式 the best way to do sth
.
二．需要掌握的句型
1. 你周末通常做什么？ What do you usually do on weekends?
2. 她周末做什么？她有时帮忙做家务。
What does she do on weekends? She sometimes help
with housework.
3.你多久去看电影？ How often do you go to the movies?
4. 我去看电影大概一个月一次。 I go to the movies maybe once a month.
5. 你最喜欢的节目是什么？ What’s your favourite program?
6. 我最喜欢的节目是动物世界。 My favourite program is Animal world.
7. 下周我相当忙。 Next week is quite full for me.
8. 你正在学习哪种舞蹈？ What kind of dance are you learning?
9. 我上舞蹈课和钢琴课。 I have dance and piano lessons.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
128
10. 他们多久熬夜？ How often do they stay up late?
11. 他一天至少玩两次。 He plays at least twice a week.
12. 她说它对我的健康有好处。 She says it’s good for my health.
13. 你每晚睡多少小时？ How many hours do you sleep every night?
14. 五中的学生在业余时间做什么？
what do No. 5 High School students do in their free
time?
15. 上个月我们问了我们的学生关于他
们业余时间的活动。
Last month we asked our students about their free time
activities.
16. 我们发现只有 15%的学生每天锻炼。
We found that only fifteen percent of our students
exercise every day.
17. 45%一周锻炼四到六次。 Forty -five percent exercise four to six times a week.
18. 而且 20%根本不锻炼。 And twenty percent do no exercise at all.
19. 我们都知道许多学生经常上网。 We all know that many students often go online.
20. 我们很惊讶他们中 90%每天都使用
网络。
We were surprised that ninety percent of them use the
Internet every day.
21.大多数学生用它是为了娱乐而不是家
庭作业。
Most students use it for fun and not for homework.
22. 关于我们看电视的问题的回答也很
有趣。
The answers to our questions about watching TV were
also interesting.
23. 尽管许多学生喜欢看运动节目，但游
戏节目是最受欢迎的。
Although many students like to watch sports, game
shows are the most popular.
24. 通过使用网络或观看游戏节目放松
是好的。
It is good to relax by using the Internet or watching
game shows.
25.我们认为通过锻炼的方式来放松是最
好的。
We think the best way to relax is through exercise.
26. 它有利于身心健康。 It is healthy for the mind and the body.
27. 旧习难除。 Old habits die hard.
28.简是一名美国 16 岁的高中生。
Jane is a 16-year-old high school student in the United
States.
29. 简有许多好习惯。 Jane has a lot of good habits.
30. 他经常喝桔汁而且几乎不熬夜。 She often drinks juice and she hardly ever stays up late.
31. 她通常看电视一天超过两小时 She usually watches TV for more than two hours a day.
32. 她从不去看牙医做牙齿清洁。 She never goes to the dentist for teeth cleaning.
33. 你大多数时间对你的健康很关注。 You’re smart about your health most of the time.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
129
◇总第 50 课时
Unit 3 I ’m more outgoing than my sister.
一．需要掌握的短语
与 ⋯⋯ 一样 as⋯as⋯ 唱歌比赛 the singing competition
与 ⋯⋯ 相像的 be similar to 和 ⋯⋯ 相同 he same as
关心；介意 care about 像一面镜子 be like a mirror
只要；既然 as long as 使显现；使表现出 bring out
取得更好的成绩 get better grades 伸手取 reach for
事实上；实际上 in fact 交朋友 make friends
感动某人 touch one’s heart 有音乐天赋 be talented in music
擅长 ⋯⋯ be good at=do well in 善于与 ⋯⋯ 相处 be good with
享受做某事的乐趣 have fun doing sth. 让某人做某事 make sb. do sth.
二．需要掌握的句型
1. Sam 的头发比 Tom 长。 （P17) Sam has longer hair than Tom.
2. Sam 和 Tom 都会击鼓。（P17) Both Sam and Tom can play the drums.
3. Tina 比 Tara高。（P17) Tina is taller than Tara.
4. 而且她唱得也比 Tara 声音大。 （P17) And she also sings more loudly than Tara.
5. 你喜欢昨天的歌唱比赛吗？（ P18） Did you like the singing competition yesterday?
6. 我认为 Lisa 唱得比 Nelly 更好。（P18） I think Lisa sang better than Nelly.
7. 但你能知道 Lisa 真的想赢。 （P18） You can tell that Lisa really wanted to win, though.
8. 但是最重要的事是学点新的东西并且开
心。（P18）
But the most important thing is to learn something
new and have fun.
9. 汤姆比萨姆友好吗？不，不是。 （P19） Is Tom friendlier than Sam? No, he isn ’t.
10. Tara 和 Tina 工作一样努力吗？（ P19） Does Tara work as hard as Tina?
11. 我现在比两年前更高 .（P19） I’m taller now than I was two years ago.
12. 谁在学校更勤奋 ?（P19） Who’s more hard-working at school?
13. 你母亲和父亲，谁更聪明？（ P19） Who is smarter, your mother or your father?
14. 你哥哥和姐姐，谁歌唱得更好。 （P19） Who sings better, your brother or your sister?
15. 我认为一个好朋友让我笑。 （P20） I think a good friend makes me laugh.
16. 一个好朋友做和我相同的事。 （P20） A good friend likes to do the same things as me.
17. 莫莉比她最好的朋友学习更努力。 （P20） Molly studies harder than her best friend.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
130
18. 玛丽和她最好的朋友都高。 （P20） Mary and her best friend are both tall.
19. 我母亲告诉我一个好朋友像一面镜子。 My mother told me a good friend is like a mirror.
20. 那就是我喜欢看书和在班级努力学习的
原因。 （P21)
That’s why I like reading books and I study harder
in class.
21. 我们喜欢一起学习。 （P21) We enjoy studying together.
22. 我腼腆，所以对我来说交朋友不容易。 I’m shy so it ’s not easy for me to make friends.
23. 朋友只要好，不需要太多。 （P21)
You don’t need a lot of friends as long as they’re
good.
24. 完全一样是没有必要的。 （P21) It ’s not necessary to be the same.
25. 我最好的朋友跟我很不同。 （P21) My best friend is quite different from me.
26. 然而，拉里经常帮我显现出我最好的一
面。（P21)
However, Larry often helps to bring out the best in
me.
27. 尽管拉里远远没有我勤奋。 （P21) Larry is much less hard-working, though.
28. 我总是得到比他更好的成绩。 （P21) I always get better grades than he does.
29. 我真的不在乎我的朋友和我相同还是不
同。（P21)
I don ’t really care if my friends are the same as me
or different.
30. 真正的朋友是援手相助并能感动你心灵
的人。（P21)
A true friend reaches for your hand and touches your
heart.
31. 她比我认识的任何一个人都有趣。 （P21) She’s funnier than anyone I know.
32. 我去年摔坏了手臂， 但是他让我笑并且让
我觉得好多了。 （P21)
I broke my arm last year but she made me laugh and
feel better.
33. 我们可以谈论和分享任何事情。 （P21) We can talk about and share everything.
34. 我知道她关心我，因为她总是在聆听。
（P21)
I know she cares about me because she’s always
there to listen.
35. 杰夫没有大多数孩子那样认真。 （P22) Jeff is less serious than most kids.
36. 杰夫没有大多数孩子那样认真。 （P22) Jeff isn’t as serious as most kids.
37. 黄蕾没有拉里擅长网球。 （P22) Huang Lei isn ’t as good at tennis as Larry.
38. 我最好的朋友和拉里相似， 因为她没有我
勤奋。 （P22)
My best friend is similar to Larry because she ’s less
hard-working than me.
39. 它让我想起我最好的朋友。 It makes me think about my best friend.
40. 英语学习中心需要一名为小学生服务的
周末学生助手。 （P24)
The English study Center needs a weekend student
helper for primary school students.
41. 你必须英语成绩好。 （P24) You must have good grades in English.
42. 你必须与孩子友好相处。 You must be good with children.
43. 请打电话 443-5667 给英语学习中心了解 Call the English Study Center at 443-5667 for more
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
131
更多信息。 information.
44. 我认为她应当得到这份工作。 I think she should get the job.
45. 我最好的朋友比我外向的多。 My best friend is a lot more outgoing than me.
46. 我哥哥和我姐姐一样认真。 My brother is as serious as my sister.
◇总第 51 课时
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
132
Unit 4 What ’s the best movie theater?
一．需要掌握的短语
电影院 movie theater 离 ⋯⋯ 近 close to⋯
服装店 clothes store 在镇上 in town
到目前为止 so far 坐公共汽车 10 分钟
的路程 10 minutes by bus
才艺表演 talent show 共同；共有 in common
世界各地；全世界 around the world 越来越 ⋯⋯ more and more⋯⋯
等等 and so on 各种各样的 all kinds of ⋯⋯
是 ⋯⋯ 的 职 责 ；
由 ⋯⋯ 决定 be up to 并不是每个人 not everybody
编造（故事、 谎言等） make up
在 ⋯⋯ 方面发挥作用
/有影响
play a role in ⋯
例如 for example 认真对待 take⋯seriously
给某人某物 give sb. sth. （梦想、 希望） 实现；
达到 come true
二．需要掌握的句型
1. 电影世界有最大的屏幕。 Movie World has the biggest screens.
2. 银屏都市是这个附近最受欢迎的。 Screen City is the most popular near here.
3. 城镇电影院离家最近。 Town Cinema is the closest to home.
4. 最好的电影院是那家？ What’s the best movie theater?
5. 我认为月亮剧场有最舒适的座椅。 I think Moon Theater has the most comfortable seats.
6. DJ 们选择歌曲最仔细。 The DJs choose songs the most carefully.
7. 欢迎来到这个社区。 Welcome to the neighborhood.
8. 到目前为止你觉得它怎么样？ How do you like it so far?
9. 它好极了，但我还不清楚我周围路。
It ’s fantastic, but I still don’t really know my way
around.
10.最好的超市在中心街上。 The best supermarket is on Center Street.
11. 你可以坐得最舒服， 因为他们有最大的
座位。
You can sit the most comfortably because they have the
biggest seats.
12. 谢谢你告诉我。 Thanks for telling me.
13. 去哪家电影院最好？ What’s the best movie theater to go to?
14. 镇里最差的服装店是哪家？ Which is the worst clothes store in town?
15. 你认为 970AM 电台怎么样？ What do you think of 970 AM?
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
133
= How do you like 970 AM?
16. 在那里你可以最快的买到票。 You can buy tickets the most quickly there.
17. 菜单上只有 10 种菜，而且服务一点也
不好。
The menu had only 10 dishes and the service was not
good at all.
18. 他在那部电影表演的最好。 He acted the best in that movie.
19. 才艺表演变得越来越受欢迎。 Talent shows are getting more and more popular.
20. 现在全世界有类似的表演， 如《中国达
人秀》 。
Now there are similar show around the world, such as
China’s Got Talent.
21. 所有这些节目都有一个共同点。 All these shows have one thing in common.
22. 他们试图寻找最好的歌手、 最令人兴奋
的魔术师等等。
They try to look for the best singers, the most exciting
magicians and so on.
23. 各种各样的人参加这些表演。 All kinds of people join these shows.
24. 当人们看这些节目时， 他们通常扮演着
决定获胜者的角色。
When people watch the show, they usually play a role in
deciding the winner.
25. 看别人展示他们的才艺总是很有趣的。
It ’s always interesting to watch other people show their
talents.
26. 这由你决定。 That’s up to you to decide.
27. 然而，不是每个人都喜欢看这些节目。 However, not everybody enjoys watching these shows.
28. 一些人认为表演者的生活是被编造的。 Some think that the lives of the performers are made up.
29. 然而， 如果你不是太严肃地对待这些表
演，它们看起来就是有趣的。
However, if you done’t take these shows too seriously,
they are fun to watch.
30. 它们提供给人们实现自己梦想的途径。 They give people a way to make their dreams come true.
31. 达人秀有什么共同之处？ What do talent shows have in common?
32. Greenwood Park 是周末最佳的去处。 Greenwood Park is the best place to go to on weekends.
33. 因为几乎人人都到那里看街头艺人。 Almost everyone goes there to see the street performers.
34. 每人在格林伍德公园里都有可做的事。 There is something for everyone at Greenwood Park.
35. 我认为青岛是中国最好的城市， 因为它
最美丽。
I think Qingdao is the best city in China because it is the
most beautiful.
◇总第 52 课时
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
134
Unit 5 Do you want to watch a game show?
一．需要掌握的短语
想要看电影 wants to watch a movie 希望看情景喜剧 hope to watch a sitcom
期待看新闻节目 expect to watch the
news
计划看体育节目 plan to watch a sports
show
认为 think of 向 ⋯⋯ 学习 learn from
查明；弄清楚 find out 谈话节目 talk show
游戏节目 game show 肥皂剧 soap opera
看电影 watch a movie 一双；一对 a pair of
尽某人最大努力 try one’s best 与 ⋯⋯ 一样有名 as famous as
就⋯⋯ 讨论 ve a discussion about 有一天 one day
例如 such as 打扮；梳理 dress up
代替 take sb.’s place 干得好 do a good job
令人愉快的东西 something enjoyable 有趣的资料 interesting information
全世界 around the world ⋯的象征 a symbol of ⋯
让某人做某事 let sb. do sth. 计划 /打算做某事 plan to do sth.
希望做某事 hope to do sth. 碰巧做某事 happen to do sth.
盼望做某事 expect to do sth. 做 ⋯⋯ 怎么样？ How about doing ⋯?
乐于做某事 be ready to do sth 尽力做某事 try one’s best to do sth.
二．需要掌握的句型
1. 你们认为脱口秀怎么样？ What do you think of talk shows?
2. 那么让我们看脱口秀吧。 Then let’s watch a talk show.
3. 林慧认为她能从情景喜剧中学到一些好
的笑话。
Lin Hui thinks she can learn some great jokes from
sitcoms.
4. 萨利认为游戏节目比情景喜剧更有教育
意义。
Sally thinks games shows are more educational than
sitcoms.
5. 你计划今晚看新闻吗？ Do you plan to watch the news tonight?
6. 因为我希望弄清世界各地正在发生的
事。
Because I hope to find out what’s going on around the
world.
7. 我们讨论了关于电视节目的话题。 We had a discussion about TV shows.
8. 我喜欢跟随剧情，看后面会发生什么。 I like to follow the story and see what happens next.
9. 但我最喜欢的电视节目是新闻和谈话节
目。
But my favorite TV shows are the news and talk shows.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
135
10. 你可以期待从它们那里学到很多知识。 You can expect to learn a lot from them.
11. 我希望有朝一日成为一名电视记者。 I hope to be a TV reporter one day.
12. 你计划今晚看体育节目吗？ Do you plan to watch a sports show tonight?
13. 我喜欢看动作电影，因为它们令人激
动。
I like to watch action movies because they ’re exciting.
14. 当人们说到“文化”时，我们想到了艺
术和历史。
When people say “culture”, we think of art and history.
15. 但是美国文化中一个非常著名的象征
是卡通片。
But one very famous symbol in American culture is a
cartoon.
16. 80 多年前他首次出现在卡通片中。 Over 80 years ago, he first appeared in the the Cartoon.
17. 它是第一部有声音和音乐的卡通片。 It was the first cartoon with sound and music.
18. 期中一个主要原因是米老鼠像一个普
通男人。
One of the main reasons is the Mickey was like a
common man.
19. 但他总是试着面对任何危险。 But he always tried to face any danger.
20. 米琪是不幸的， 而且有许多麻烦， 比如
失去自己的房子或女朋友。
Mickey was unlucky and had many problems such as
losing his house or girlfriend.
21. 然而，他总是准备着尽自己最大力量。 However, he was always ready to try his best.
22. 它来源于一个古老的中国故事。 It comes from an old Chinese story.
23. 她打扮成一个男孩并代替他父亲在军
队打仗。
She dress up like a boy and takes her father’s place to
fight in the army.
24. 我认为女演员很好地扮演了木兰的角
色。
I think the actress played Mulan ’s role well.
25. 其他的演员也不错，在电影中演的很
好。
The other actors are also fantastic and they did a good
job in the movie.
26. 这部电影展示了她对家庭、 朋友和国家
的爱。
The movie shows her love for her family, friends and
country.
27. 我不能忍受看无聊的电影。 I can’t stand watching the boring movies.
28. 我能代替他去打篮球吗？ Can I take his place to play basketball?
29. 他们在考试中考得不错。 They did a good job in the exam.
30. 她很乐意和你一起去购物。 She is ready to go shopping with you.
31. 迈克在那部戏中装扮得像个小女孩。 Mike dressed up like a little girl in that play.
◇总第 53 课时
Unit 6 I ’m going to study computer science.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
136
一．需要掌握的短语
成长；长大 grow up 每天 every day
对 ⋯⋯ 有把握 be sure about 确信；务必 make sure
把⋯⋯ 送到 ⋯⋯ send⋯to⋯ 能 be able to
⋯的意思 the meaning of⋯ 不同种类的 different kinds of
写下；记下 write down 关于；与 ⋯⋯ 有关系 have to do with
开始做；学着做 take up 几乎不；很少 hardly ever
太⋯⋯而不能⋯⋯ too⋯to⋯ 打算做某事 be going to do sth.
练习做某事 practice doing 不断地做某事 keep on doing sth.
学会做某事 learn to do sth. 做完某事 finish doing sth.
许诺去做某事 promise to do sth. 帮助某人做某事 help sb. to do sth.
记住做某事 remember to do sth. 同意做某事 agree to do sth.
喜爱做某事 love to do sth. 想要做某事 want to do sth.
二．需要掌握的句型
1. 你长大后想当什么？ What do you want to be when you grow up?
2. 我想当篮球运动员。 I want to be a basketball player.
3. 你打算怎样做呢？ How are you going to do that?
4. 我打算每天练习篮球。 I’m going to practice basketball every day.
5. 陈汉想当什么？ What does Chen Han want to be?
6. 他想当工程师。 He wants to be an engineer.
7. 你打算在哪工作？ Where are you going to work?
8. 我打算搬去上海。 I’m going to move to Shanghai.
9. 你打算什么时候开始。 When are you going to start?
10. 我打算念完高中和大学就开始。 I’m going to start when I finish high school and college.
11. 我正在看海明威写的《老人与海》 。 I’m reading The Old Man and the Sea by Hemingway.
12. 现在我知道你为什么如此擅长写故事。 Now I know why you ’re so good at writing stories.
13. 当然我打算坚持写作。 I’m going to keep on writing stories, of course.
14. 只要确保你尽了最大努力。 Just make sure you try your best.
15. 那么你就能够做你想做的任何事。 Then you can be anything you want!
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
137
16. 他打算上表演课。 He’s going to take acting lessons.
17. 我打算在大学里学习医科。 I’m going to study medicine at a university.
18. 我打算写文章并且寄给杂志和报纸。
I’m going to write articles and send them to magazine
and newspapers.
19. 我打算学另外一门外语。 I’m going to learn another foreign language.
20. 我打算努力学习，取得好成绩。 I’m going to study hard and get good grades.
21. 我想要多锻炼。 I want to get a lot of exercise.
22.大多数时候，我们对其他人许下承诺。 Most of the time, we make promises to other people.
23.然而你对自己许下的承诺就是决心。 However, promises you make to yourself are resolutions.
24. 当我们在年初下决心时， 我们希望我们
会改善我们的生活。
When we make resolutions at the beginning of the
year,we hope that we are going to improve our lives.
25. 一些人为即将到来的一年写下决心和
计划。
Some people write down their resolutions and plans for
the coming year.
26. 很多决心和自我完善有关。 Many resolutions have to do with self-improvement.
27. 一些人可能说他们打算培养一种兴趣
爱好，诸如画画或摄影。
Some people might say they are going to take up a hobby
like painting or taking photos
28.尽管有所不同，但大多数决心有一个共
同点。
Although there are differences,most resolutions have one
thing in common.
29. 人们几乎难以坚持它们。 People hardly ever keep them!
30. 有时尽心可能很难，以至于难以坚持。 Somethings the resolutions may be too difficult to keep.
31.因此，一些人说最好的决心是不要有决
心。
For this reason,some people say the best resolutions is to
have no resolutions!
32. 第一个决心是关于我的个人提升。
The first resolution is about my own personal
improvement.
33.第二个决心是关于改善我和家人、朋友
的关系。
The second resolution is about improving my
relationships withe my family and friends.
◇总第 54 课时
Unit 7 Will people have robots?
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
138
一．需要掌握的短语
在电脑上 on computer 在纸上 on paper
活到 200 岁 live to do 200 years old 空闲时间 free time
处于极大危险之中 be in great danger 在地球上 on the earth
参与某事 play a part in (doing)sth. 太空站 space station
寻找 look for 电脑编程员 computer programmer
在未来 in the future 许多；成百上千 hundreds of
与 ⋯⋯ 一样 the same⋯as⋯ 多次；反复地 over and over again
感到厌烦的 get bored 醒来 wake up
倒塌 fall down
二．需要掌握的句型
1.你认为人们家里将有机器人吗？（ P49） Do you think there will be robots in people ’s homes?
2. 我认为每个家庭都将有一个机器人。 I think every home will have a robot.
3. 他们将在家用电脑学习。 They’ll study at home on computers.
4. 人们将不用钱了。一切都将是免费。 People won’t use money. Everything will be free.
5. 人们将活到 200 岁。 People will live to be 200 years old.
6. 将会有更少的空闲时间。 （P50） There will be less free time.
7. 人们将更少使用地铁。 People will use the subways less.
8. 我认为将有更多污染。 I think there will be more pollution.
9. 未来将是什么样的呢？ What will the future be like?
10. 环境将处于严重危险之中。 The environment will be in great danger.
11. 我们将不得不搬到其他星球去吗？ Will we have to move to other planets?
12. 我们可以少用水，并且栽更多的树。 We can use less water and plant more trees.
13. 每个人应该参与拯救地球。 Everyone should play a part in saving the earth.
14. 家人们通常花时间呆在一起。 (P51) Families usually spend time together on weekends.
15.在我的城市我有时看到蔚蓝的天空。 I sometimes see blue skies in my city.
16. 我住在这条街对面的一个公寓里。 I live in an apartment across the street from here.
17. 他们通常像人类的仆人。 They are usually like human servants.
18. 它们帮忙做家务并且做一些诸如脏的
或危险地方的工作。
They help with the housework and do jobs like working
in dirty or dangerous places.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
139
19. 现在已经有机器人在工厂工作了。 Today there are already robots working in factories.
20. 他们反复地做着简单的工作。 They do simple jobs over and over again.
21. 未来更少的人将做这样的工作。 Fewer people will do such jobs in the future.
22. 科学家们现在正尝试让机器人看起来
像人类，并且做和我们相同的事。
Scientists are now trying to make robots look like
humans and do the same things as we do.
23. 但很难使他们真正地像人类一样思考。
It will be difficult to make them really think like a
human.
24. 然而他们同意这可能需要数百年时间。 However, they agree it may take hundreds of years.
25. 这些新的机器人将有很多不同的外形。 These new robots will have many different shapes.
26. 作为一名记者， 我认为我将遇到很多有
趣的人。
As a reporter, I think I will meet lots of interesting
people.
27. 我的公寓将不适合养宠物。 My apartment will be no good for pets.
◇总第 55 课时
Unit 8 Will people have robots?
一．需要掌握的短语
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
140
奶昔 milk shake 打开 turn on
把⋯⋯倒入⋯⋯ pour⋯into⋯ 一杯酸奶 a cup of yogurt
好主意 a good idea 在星期六 on Saturday
切碎 cut up 把⋯⋯放入⋯⋯ put⋯into⋯
还有一件事 one more thing 一片 /张/段/首⋯ a piece of⋯
在这时 at this time 一些；几个 a few
用⋯⋯把⋯⋯装满 fill ⋯ with ⋯ 用⋯⋯覆盖⋯⋯ cover⋯with ⋯
一个接一个 one by one 很长时间 a long time
植树 plant a tree 做牛肉面 make beef noodles
洗衣服 wash clothes 从图书馆借一本
书
take out a book from the
library
二．需要掌握的句型
1. 你如何制作香蕉奶昔？ How do you make a banana milk shake?
2. 首先，剥一个香蕉。 First, peel the bananas.
3. 接着，切香蕉。 Next, cut up the bananas.
4. 下一步，把香蕉和酸奶放进搅拌器。 Next, put the bananas and yogurt into the blender.
5. 下一步，把牛奶倒进搅拌器。 Next, pour the milk into the blender.
6. 接着，打开搅拌器。 Then, turn on the blender.
7. 最后，喝奶昔。 Finally, drink the milk shake.
8. 我们需要多少香蕉？ How many bananas do we need?
9. 我们需要多少酸奶？ How much yogurt do we need?
10. 我想为周六的聚会做罗宋汤。 I want to make Russian soup for a party on Saturday.
11. 之后 , 煮 30 分钟。 After that, cook them for 30 minutes.
12. 接着，加洋白菜、西红柿和洋葱再煮
10 分钟。
Then, add the cabbage, tomatoes and onions and cook
for another 10 minutes.
13. 最后，不要忘了加些盐。 Finally, don ’t forget to add some salt.
14. 在大多数国家， 人们通常在特殊的节日
吃传统的食物。
In most countries, people usually eat traditional food on
special holidays.
15. 是向秋天的食物表达感恩的时间。 It is a time to give thanks for food in the autumn.
16. 此时， 人们也纪念 400 年前来美国居住
的第一批来自英格兰的旅行者。
At this time, people also remember the first travelers
from England who came to live in America about 400
years ago.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
141
17. 在第二年秋天， 他们在自己的新家里感
谢生活和食物。
In the next autumn, they gave thanks for life and food in
their new home.
18. 如今，大多数美国人仍然通过和家人在
家里吃一顿大餐的方式庆祝这种感恩的想
法。
These days, most Americans still celebrate this idea of
giving thanks by having a big meal at home with their
family.
19. 这顿饭的主菜几乎总是火鸡，一种大
鸟。
The main dish of this meal is almost always turkey, a
large bird.
20. 这里有一种为感恩节晚餐做火鸡的方
法。
Here is one way to make turkey for a Thanksgiving
dinner.
21. 首先把一些面包片， 洋葱， 盐和胡椒粉
混合在一起。
First, mix together some bread pieces, onions, salt and
pepper.
22. 下一步，把面包混合料塞进火鸡里。 Next, fill the turkey with this bread mix.
23. 接着把火鸡放进热的微波炉烤几个小
时。
Then, put the turkey in a hot oven and cook it for a few
hours.
24. 把火鸡放在一个大盘子里并且把肉汁
淋在火鸡的表面。 Place the turkey on a large plate and cover it with gravy.
25. 最后把火鸡切成薄片就着蔬菜吃肉， 如
胡萝卜和土豆。
Finally, cut the turkey into thin pieces and eat the meat
with vegetables like carrots and potatoes.
◇总第 56 课时
2014 新人教版八年级英语上册期末复习题（一）
（ ） 1. We _______ at the party last night. We were very happy.
A. had a good time B. had good time C .had a time D. had a hard time
( )2. Mr. White ________ to go to Malaysia on vacation.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
142
A. took B. decided C. made D. enjoyed
( )3.—Mom, Bill is coming to dinner this evening.
--Ok. Let ’s give him _______ to eat.
A. anything different B. different anything C. something different D. different something
( )4. We spent three house waiting in the rain ______ you!
A. because of B. because C. and D. so
( )5.Mary _____ go to the movies. She watched TV at home.
A. isn ’t B. didn ’t C. wasn’t D. doesn’t
( )6.The box is too heavy, so ______ people can lift ( 举起 ) it.
A. few B. a few C. little D. a little
( )8The new movie is _____ .I ’m really ______ with it.
A. boring, boring B. bored, bored C. boring, bored D. bored, boring
( )9.—May I use your phone ? Mine doesn ’t work.
--___________ .Here your are.
A. Thank you B. Of course C. Mine is good D. You’re welcome
( )10.The book is ______ good as that one. I can ’t decide which one to buy.
A. as B. so C. like D. very
( ).11. This question is very easy._______ can work it out.
A. Someone B. Somebody C. Anybody D. Nobody
( )12. Is there ________ about Shenzhou X( 神舟十号 ) today?
A. anything new B. new anything C. some new D. new some
( )13. I went out to have a picnic ________ my friend last weekend.
A. for B. to C. with D. of
( )14.--_______________________ ? – I went to Central Park.
A. Why did you go on vacation B. How did you go on vacation
C. When did you go on vacation D. Where did you go on vacation
( )15. I didn ’t go ______ in the neighborhood last night.
A. anywhere B. somewhere C. no where D. some places
( ) 16. –Would you like to go to the movies with us? --___________ .
A. Not at all B. You’re welcome C. What a pity D. Of course
( )17.— I am busy. I can’t go home. Can you cook for _______ this evening?
--Ok, no problem.
A. myself B. yourself C. your D. anyone
( )18. The father decided ________ a new iPad for his son.
A. buys B. bought C. to buy D. buying
( )19._______ supper, we had something very special.
A. In B. By C. For D. At
（ ）20. We _______ Beijing the next morning. Mr. Li came to meet us at the railway station.
A. reached in B. reaches C. arrived in D. arrived
( )21. _______ the bad weather, I had to stayed at home to watch TV.
A. Because B. Because of C. As D. For
( )22. The city looks as beautiful ______ Zhuhai.
A. so B. like C. as D. dislike
( )23. He is not friendly. So all of us dislike _______ with him.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
143
A. playing B. play C. played D. to play
( )24.— How was your vacation, Li Ming? --_____________
A. Guess what? B. It was great. C. Wow D. What a pity!
( )25. Lily _____ at home last night. Kate and Alice ______ not at home.
A. was, was B. were, was C. were, were D. was, were
( )26.--______ your friend go to summer camp last Sunday?
--No, he _______.
A. Did, did B. Did, didn ’t C. Does, does D. Does, doesn’t
( )27.--_________? –It was rainy.
A. How is the weather B. What is the weather like
C. What was the weather like D. How was the weather like
( )28.— Did Grace go ______ on vacation? – Yes, she went to Sanya.
A. warm somewhere B. somewhere warm C. warm anywhere D. anywhere warm
( )29. I have fun ______ at the swimming pool.
A. swim B. to swim C. swimming D. swam
( )30. Do you enjoy ________ on weekends?
A. going shopping B. go shopping C. go shop D. to go shopping
( )31. We are waiting ______ the bus stop.
A. in B. at C. on D. for
( )32. He visits his grandparents ________ a month.
A. two time B. second time C. two D. twice
( )33. – How often do you exercise ?
--_______ ever. Because I am very busy with my work.
A. Hardly B. Sometimes C. Always D. Usually
( )34.-- _______ do you go to the movies? – Three times a week.
A. When B. How many C. How often D. How old
( )35. –How often ______ your mother get up early? – Very often.
A. do B. does C. is D. are
( )36.It is good to relax _____ listening to music.
A. to B. by C. with D. for
( )37. ________ they are very poor, they have enough food to eat.
A. Although B. Because C. For D. Since
( )38.We have different fruits, _______ as apples, oranges and pears.
A. so B. such C. like D. for
( )39.Mary is ______ high school student. She comes from Australia.
A. a 18-yesr-old B. a 18 years old C. an 18-years-old D. an 18 years old
( )40.I’d like to help kids ______ their homework. 第二页
A. with B. on C. does D. doing
( )41.Look, there ________ some junk food on the table.
A. is B. are C. has D have
( )42.--_______ do you usually do on weekends? – I often go to the movies.
A. How often B. How long C. Where D. What
( )43. Speak aloud, please! I can _______ hear you.
A. almost B. hardly C. usually D. often
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
144
( )44.The math is ______ boring.
A. real B. really C. reality D. to real
( )45. I like going online. I often ________ every day.
A. help with housework B. use the Internet C. watch TV D. play sports
( )46. _______ he was ill, ______ he still exercised with us together.
A. Although, but B. But, Although C. But, / D. Although, /
( )47. Junk food isn ’t _______ food and it is bad for our ________.
A. health, health B. healthy, healthy C. healthy, health D. health, healthy
( )48. Betty ’s shoes are the same _______ mine, but they are different _______ Susan’s.
A. with, from B, as, from C. as, as D. with, with
( )49. I decide to study harder this term because I want to ____________.
A. get good grades B. make good grades C. get good grade D. make good grade
( )50. Doing morning exercises _______ our health.
A. is good at B. is good for C. are good at D. are good for
( )51.— What do you think of Lily and Lucy ? —I think Lily is ________ than Lucy.
A. outgoing B. more outgoing C. much outgoing D. very outgoing
( )52. He ______ shorter hair than Mike.
A. is B. are C. have D. has
( )53. Who is ______, Kobe or Jenny?
A. tall B. taller C. tallest D. high
( )54. Xiao Lin ’s parents often make him _______ homework until 10 o ’clock in the evening.
A. do B. does C. to do D. doing
( )55. Tom is my friend. He ’s _______ more serious than me.
A. much B. little C. few D. a little of
( )56. Helen ’s parents ________ teachers in our school.
A. are all B. all are C. both are D. are both
( )57. Look! Your bag is a little smaller than _________ .
A. her B. his C. my D. their
( )58. He is _____ taller than me.
A. little B. a little C. less D. a less
( )59. Which subject do you like ________, English or Chinese ?
A. good B. well C. better D. the best
( )60. I’m very _______, but my brother is ________.
A. quiet, quiet B. quiet, quieter C. quieter, quieter D. quieter, quiet
◇总第 57 课时
2014 新人教版八年级英语上册期末复习题（二）
( ) 61. Lily is ______ at math than Jim.
A. better B. good C. well D. best
( )62. The more you read, ______ you will get.
A. the less B. the most C. the more D. much more
( )63. His story makes us ________.
A. laughs B. laugh C. laughing D. to laugh
( )64. It is too difficult for me _______ study English well.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
145
A. to B. for C. in D. at
( )65.— Where is Shanghai Theater ?
--It ’s ______ the tall building .It takes five minutes to walk there.
A. close B. close to C. far from D. far
( )66. Of all the subjects, which do you think is ________ ?
A. important B. more important C. the most important D. the important
( )67. --Who is __________ student in your class? --Sam is. He always helps others.
A. friendly B. friendlier C. the friendliest D. the most friendly
( )68. If you do that, you ’ll feel ______ soon.
A. more healthy B. more healthier C. much healthy D. much healthier
( )69. Beijing is one of ______ cities in China
A. the big B. the biggest C. the bigest D. biggest
( )70. I think Liu Qian is ______ magician in the world.
A. the best B. the better C. good D. better
( )71.Zhen Zidan and Li Lianjie have much _______. And they often play similar roles in movies.
A. in common B. in fact C. in the end D. in all
( )72. I bought a lot of gifts yesterday. I will ________ them to my best friends.
A. give B. buy C. find D. act
( )73. –Who is ______ careful, Linda, Lisa or Laura? --Linda is.
A. very B. much C. more D. the most
( )74.My sister doesn ’t like the show at all. He can ’t _________ it.
A. need B. love C. stand D. take
( )75.I don’t ________ what to eat at all. You can decide yourself.
A. mind B. like C. have D. want
( )76.--_____ do you think of soap operas? —I love it.
A. Why B. Who C. how D. What
( )77.— We are planning _______ on a fantastic vacation on the beach this summer holiday.
--Have a good time.
A. go B. goes C. to go D. going
( )78.— What do you think of the talk show?--____________.
A.I want to buy one B. I am happy C. I don ’t like it D. they’re for children
( )79.What happened _______ Mike yesterday?
A. at B. to C. in D. on
( )80. Wu Jun is a funny boy. He always tells us _______to make us laugh.
A. stories B. photos C. jokes D. dreams
( )81.I have two brothers. One is a teacher, ________ is a doctor.
A. another B. other C. others D. the other 第四页
（ ） 82.Mary felt very sad because she ________ her new bicycle.
A. place B. lost C. made D. stood
( )83.--______ do you think ______ the sports shows? – I love them.
A. How; of B. What; of C. What; in D. How; in
( )84. Do you mind ______ the door ?
A. open B. opening C. to open D. opened
( )85. I don ’t like sitcoms. I can ’t _________ them.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
146
A. stand B. hate C. mind D. unlike
( )86. Thanks for _______ me study English yesterday.
A. help B. helped C. helps D. helping
( )87.—Do you like watching game shows?
--Yes, I enjoy _______ them.
A. watch B. to watch C. watch D. watching
( )88. People expect _______ such a funny magician.
A. see B. saw C. to see D. seeing
( )89.The writer ’s new book came out ______ March 5 th, 2012.
A. in B. on C. at D. for
( )90.Lei Feng _____ always______ help the people in danger.
A. was; ready for B. is ;ready to C. was; ready to D. is; ready for
( )91.________, he lost his arm in a traffic accident （交通事故） .
A. Lucy B. Unlucky C. Unluckily D. Luckly
( )92. How do you ______ cartoons?
A. think of B. like C. look like D. think
( )93.—I think Culture China is the best show.
--Oh, no! I don ’t ________ you.
A. like it B. mind C. agree with D. agree to
( )94.I don ’t like to swim. How about ________ basketball?
A. playing B. to play C. player D. play
( )95.My father doesn ’t like the movie. I don ’t,_______.
A. too B. either C. also D. /
( )96.-- Would you mind _______ the window ?-- It ’s too hot in the room.
A. to open B. opening C. to close D. closing
( )97. We love the sports show . He _______ ,too.
A. do B. does C. like D. likes
( )98.—Can I help you? –I’d like _______ for my twin sisters.
A. two pair of shoes B. two pairs of shoes C. two pair of shoe
D. two pairs of shoe
( )99.Her mother ______ watching _______ sitcoms.
A. enjoy; enjoyable B. enjoys; enjoy C. enjoyable; enjoy D. enjoys; enjoyable
( )100.--_____ are you going to be a scientist?
--I am going to study science hard.
A. What B. How C. When D. Where
( )101.There _____ a talk show on CCTV-3 at eight this evening.
A. is going to have B. is going to be C. will have D. are going to be 第五页
( ).102. What are you going to be when you _______ ?
A. grow up B. grows C. grows up D. is going to grow up
( )103.What ’s she going to be when she _______?
A. grow up B grows C. grows up D. is going to grow up
( )104.Those boys want _______ pilots when they are older.
A. to do B. do C. to be D. have
( )105.John found a job in New York, his family are going to move _____ the city next week.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
147
A. from B. to C. away D. in
( )106.He wants to be a pianist. He is going to learn _______the piano.
A. play B. to play C. plays D. playing
( )107.If you want to be _______, you should learn math well.
A. a pilot B. an actor C. an engineer D. a soccer player
( )108.--There _______ an interesting movie tomorrow evening. —Really? Exciting news.
A. is going to be B. are going to be C. is going to have D. are going to have
( )109.Tack’s father is ______ computer programmer and his mother ______ engineer.
A. an; an B. a; a C. an; a D. a ;an
( )110.People usually make their New Year ’s resolutions at the _______of the year.
A. begin B. begining C. beginning D. begins
( )111.Next year I ’m going to _______ a new hobby, like painting or singing
A. take up B. take off C. take in D. take out
( )112. I practice ________ English every day in order to improve my oral speaking( 口语 ).
A. to say B. saying C. to speak D. speaking
( )113.—Where did you go yesterday, Rick ? --I went to see a _______ because I had a cold.
A. teacher B. doctor C. reporter D. player
( )114.—Let’s go out and enjoy the sunshine（阳光） .--________. It ’s boring to stay at home.
A. Sounds great B. Not at all C. Forget it D. No way
( )115.—What’s your _______ ?—I like listening to music.
A. job B. age C. hobby D. fan
( )116.—I think drinking milk every morning is good ______ our health. --Yes. I agree ______ you.
A. to; to B. with; to C. at; with D. for; with
( )117. The girl ______ a new computer for herself next year.
A. buy B. buys C. is buying D. is going to buy
( )118.There ______ an art show this evening. Would you like to go with me?
A. has B. have C. will be D. will have
( )119.—Will people live to be 200 years old?--__________.
A. No, they aren ’t B. No, they won ’t C. No, they don ’t D. No, they can ’t
( )120.Tom ’s English is bad and his father ’s English is _____ worse.
A. more B. even C. so D. quite
◇总第 58 课时
2014 新人教版八年级英语上册期末复习题（三）
( )121.Nothing in the world is _____ if you decide to do it.
A. possible B. probably C. impossible D. funny
( )122 The movie was very _____ and we all got _______.
A. bored; bored B. boring; boring C. bored; boring D. boring; bored
( )123—How many birds can you see in the trees?
--I can see _______ birds in them.
A. five hundreds B. five hundreds of C. hundreds of D. hundred of
( )124.Will people have robots ______ 50 years?
A. for B. on C. at D. in
( )125.I have ______ money than him, but I ’m ________ than him.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
148
A. fewer; happier B. less; happier C. more; happier D. less; richer
( )126. In three years Sally ________ a teacher.
A. will have B. was C. will be D. had
( )127.—Will there be a volleyball mach in your school ？ --____________.
A. Yes, there was B. Yes, there will C. No, there isn ’t D. No, there aren’t
( )128.—Can I help you, dear?
--Yeah, I don’t know _____ a banana milk shake. Maybe you teach me.
A. what to do B. when to make C. how to make D. why to do
( )129. Please peel the bananas and _________.
A. cut up it B. cut it up C. cut them up D. cut up them
( )130.--_______ yogurt do you need ?--- Three cups.
A. How long B. How far C. How many D. How much
( )131.I want to watch sports news. Please ________ the TV .
A. turn off B. turn on C. turn down D. turn up
( )132.—Can you ______ fruit salad? –Sorry, I can’t.
A. do B. make C. cook D. have
( )133.Thanksgiving is an important day in ________.
A. China B. Japan C. America D. Germany
( )134. Tomorrow is Mike ’s birthday. How do you plan to _______ it?
A. cover B believe C. celebrate D agree
( )135.--_____ do you make Korean kimchi （泡菜）？ --Let me tell you the way.
A. What B. Which C. How D. When
( )136.There are _______ on the table.
A. two cups of milk B .two cup of milk C. a cup of milk D. two cups of milks
( )137. Don’t ______ the milk into the bottle . It ’s full.
A. pour B. drink C. eat D. take
( )138.We need _______. A. three spoon honey B. three spoons honey
C. three spoons of honey D. three spoons of honeys
( )139.You must _____ the bananas before eating them.
A. pour B. put C. peel D. cut
( )140.—Let’s make fruit salad.--___________
A. I think so B. Do you think so? C. Sorry, I don ’t know. D. That ’s a good idea.
( )141.---Can I help you, sir? ---Yes, I ’d like five _____ and some beef.
A. potato B. tomatoes C potatos D. banana
( )142. Bring some butter and put ______ on the bread.
A. it B. them C. one D. they
( )143.They arrived here ______ 5:30 _______ Saturday afternoon.
A. at; in B. at; on C at; at D. / ;on 第七页
（ ） 144.—I don’t like this shirt. Can you give me ______ one? —Of course.
A. another B. other C. others D. the others
( )145.James plays ______ piano very well, but he isn ’t good at playing ______basketball.
A. a; a B. the ; the C. the ; / D. / ; the
( )146.—Can you come to play chess with me?--____________.
A. No, I can ’t B. Yes, I’d like C. Sure, I’d love to D. Yes, I’d love
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
149
( )147.Wang Gang can’t go hiking with us today. He _______ take care of his sick mother.
A. may B. mustn’t C. needn’t D. has to
( )148.--__________ ? —It’s May the 12 th.
A. What day is it B. What ’s the date today C. What’s today D. What date is it
( )149.—Can you come to play soccer with me this afternoon?
---I ’d love to,______ I have to look after my sister at home.
A. so B. but C. without because D. and
( )150.—Did you have breakfast this morning?
--No. I got up late and went to school _______ breakfast.
A. for B. in C. without D. after
( )151.—Why not ______ a basketball match on 7:30pm on TV ? --That’s a good idea.
A. watch B. watching C. to watch D. watches
( )152.—Can you come to party ? --_______. I must study for the English test.
A. No, I can ’t B. Sure, I can’t C. Yes, I’d love to D. Sorry, I can ’t
( )153.It is ______ cold today. Please wear more clothes.
A. too many B. much too C. many too D. too much
( )154.I can’t go out with you. I have _______ housework to do today.
A. too much B. much too C. too many D. many too
( )155.The little girl did n’t stop crying （哭） _____ she found her mother.
A. after B. until C. because D. when
( )156.--______ you turn down your radio, please ？－ Yes, I can.
A. May B. Need C. Must D. Can
( )157. We are looking forward to _____ you again.
A. see B. seeing C. saw D. seem
( )158.Sue wants to _______ this summer vacation, but she isn ’t sure where to go.
A. take a shower B. take a trip C. take notes D. take care of
( )159.—John’s dog died last week. That made him very _______.
A. sad B. pleased C. easy D. interesting
( )160.—Why can’t you come to her party ? –Because I ______ the flu.
A. take B. have C. get D. give
( )161.—Betty, Let ’s go camping ______ Sunday morning. —Sounds great!
A. on B. in C. at D. to
( )162.—When did you go to bed last night? --I didn ’t go to bed ______ my father got home.
A. until B. after C. when D. before
( )163. We invited Lily ______ dinner with us.
A. to have B. had C. has D. having
( )164.They are not free. They _____ have to take part in a meeting.
A. must B. should C. can D. might
( )165.—What’s today? --_________ .
A. It ’s sunny B. It ’s fine C. It ’s October, 12 D. It ’s Sunday morning
( )166.Ted can’t going fish with us tomorrow. He has to ______.
A. look for B. look at C. look after D. look like
( )167 If you ______ to the party, you ’ll have a great time.
A. go B. went C. to go D. goes
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
150
( )168.Linda ’s mother _____ back if she _____ her work this week.
A. comes; finishes B. comes ; will finish C. will come; finishes
D. will come; will finish
( )169.— Do you often help your brother with his English ? ---No. He learns English by _______ .
A. us B. him C. his D. himself
( )170. If Tom ______ the game , we ’ll give a surprise.
A. win B. wins C. won D. winning
( )171.If I have time, I would like ________ to Guilin.
A. to travel B. travel C. traveling D. travelled
( )172.The girl is _______ . We like her very much .
A. boring B. sad C. understanding D. bored
( )173.— Would you like to come to dinner tonight? —I will ______ I am not too busy .
A. and B. if C. so D. but
( )174.— Did they ________ a great time yesterday ? —Yes. They enjoyed _______ .
A. have ; them B. had ; they C. have ; themselves D. has ; myself
( )175.Tom is clever but lazy. If he works harder, he ______ better grades.
A. gets B. got C .getting D. will get
( )176.We will go for a picnic if it ________ tomorrow.
A. doesn’t rain B. wasn’t rainy C. won ’t rain D. wasn’t raining
( )177.— May I use your dictionary ?--________ .
A. Never mind B. You are welcome C. It doesn’t matter D. Certainly. Here you are
( )178._______ travelers come to visit our city every year.
A. Hundred of B. Hundreds of C. Five hundreds D. Hundred
( )179.Mr.Wang finished ________ his book last month.
A. writing B. to write C. wrote D .writeing
( )180.If you want to be healthier , you ’d better eat _____ meat and take ______ exercise.
A. fewer ; less B. less ; more C. fewer; more D. more; less
◇总第 59 课时
2014 新人教版八年级英语上册期末复习题（三）
用所给词的适当形式填空
1--.Did you go out yesterday ? —No, I _______ ( stay) at home.
2. Yang Liping ________ (go) to Beijing with her friends by plane yesterday.
3.—Where _______ (do) Amy go on vacation last summer ? She went to the beach.
4. He visited ______ (he) aunt last spring .
5. Many __________ (visit) arrived at the Stone Forest in 2012.
6. He __________ (play) with his friends just now.
7. They ________ (swim) with their friends yesterday.
8.Did she go to the park with__________ (someone) last year?
9.Did you _______ (go) to Central Park with your family?
10. Mary ________ (be) on vacation yesterday afternoon.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
151
11.Yunnan is a ____________ (wonder) place.
12. I have a lot of housework ________ (do).
13. The movie was very _________ (bored).
14.There were a lot of__________ (store) here in the past.
15. We __________ (buy) lots of delicious food in Yunnan last year.
16.I really enjoy _________ (talk) to you.
17.What is the ______________ (different) between you and her?
18.I find fishing more ____________ ( enjoy) than sleeping.
19.You should look after __________(your) when you study in Yunnan University.
20.There are some __________ (bird) singing on the tree.
21.Tom lives in that tall ___________ (build) .
22.I use the Internet __________ (two) a week.
23.Tina often goes ___________ (shop) with her mother on weekends.
24.They __________ (hard) ever eat out.
25. My grandma looks very __________ (health).
26.Do you want anything ____________ (drink) ?
27.Thank you for ___________ (teach) us well.
28.Linda eats junk food __________ (one) a week.
29.We all know that Mo Yan is a famous ___________ (write).
30.He usually ___________ (watch) TV on weekends.
31.Brushing teeth twice a day is good for your ________ ( healthy).
32.My sister is ______________ (outgoing) than me.
33.LiuXia is _________ (tall) than Liu Li.
34.Who is the __________(win) of the 100 meters race?
35.Jim works as _________(hard) as Ben. So they both get good grades.
36.I can dance __________(well) than any other student in our class.
37.The new student in our class as ___________ (friend) as your sister.
38.A true friend _________ (reach) for your hand and touches your heart.
39.I like the friend who is a good ___________ (listen).
40.I like to have a friend who enjoys _________ (tell) jokes.
41. Lingling has long hair, but her sister ’s hair is longer than ________ (her).
42.Tom speaks more __________ (quick) than his friends.
43.There are a lot of ____________(different) between the two girls.
44.My mother is ___________________(friendly) than her mother.
45.Thanks for ___________(invite) us to your party.
46.The girl is __________ (talent).She can sing, dance, draw well.
47.My little sister often makes my family __________ (laugh).
48.Pedro gets to school ____________( early) than Paul.
49.My son is __________(thin) than her.
50.Students should take their studies ___________ (serious).
51. The famous singer sings the __________________ (beautiful) of all.
52. Liu Qian is the funniest ____________ (magic).
53.I expect my friend _________ (come) back from America soon , and hope ________(bring)
Some gifts to me.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
152
54. How about _________ (go) fishing?
55.I can’t stand _________(talk) about this in front of me.
56.Most of ________(they) went to the beach.
57.Yang Liwei became the ___________(one) astronaut in space in China.
58.Saying is much ___________(easy) than doing.
59.English is ___________________(popular) of all the subjects in my class.
60.My dream job is to be a __________(report).
61.This apple is ____________(bad) of the three. I don ’t like it.
62.We usually have three ___________(meal) a day.
63.We all know Jackie Chan is a famous _________(act).
64.Lang Lang is one of ________________(creative) pianists in the world.
65.Everyone __________(need) care and love.
66.Sun Yang is a __________ (win) ,He won the first prize in the swimming competition.
67.Don’t take this show too _____________ (serious). It ’s just for fun .
68.Do you like ___________ (read) newspaper?
69.Mary ______________(not mind) watching talk shows .
70.Let ’s ___________ (watch) a talk show .
71.Idon’t want to watch soap operas because they are ____________(meaning) .
72.I think the sports shows is ___________(enjoy).
73.They think the game shows are _____________(education) .
74.Young people like __________( act) movies.
75.Tom and Mary like ___________(cartoon) .
76._________(lucky) ,he didn ’t pass the English exam .
77.Zhang Ziyi is a well-known __________ and Jackie Chan is a famous ______ (act).
78.Wu Lei is going to be a _________(violin)when he grows up 。
79.My brother wants to be a computer ____________(program) .
80.—What does your uncle do?—He is a bus_________(drive) .
◇总第 60 课时
2014 新人教版八年级英语上册期末复习题（四）
81.—Do you know the __________ (science)? —Yes .H e is Yuan Longping .
82.Keep on ________ (try) , your dream is sure to come true .
83.Some girls are taking ______(act) lessons .
84.This house is too small .We _______________ (buy) a big one next year .
85.Jenny wants ___________(learn) Chinese history .
86. Listen! That girl ____________(sing) in her room 。
87.For health , we should eat more vegetables and _________(little) fast food .
88.Some resolutions have________ (do) with physical health .
89.At the __________(begin) of this year , I made a promise to my parents .
90.She is going to be a writer when she _________(grow) up .
91.My cousin is better than at __________ (draw) .
92.They _____________(leave) for New York next year .
93.I want to be a writer . I ’m going to keep on_________(write) .
94.They __________(not have) any classes next week .
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
153
95.Betty __________(write) to her parents tomorrow .
96. I hope there will be less ___________(pollute)in the future .
97.—What ______ you_______ (do) this afternoon ? --I __________ (play) basketball with Jim .
98.Kate often _________(watch) TV at home , but yesterday she ______( see) a new film .
99.There __________(be) more trees in 50 years.
100-- ________ there _______(be) more buildings ? —No, there won’t
101.It ’s ___________(possible) for him to cook dinner , because he is so young .
102.Her father might ________ ( go ) to America .
103.I think there will be more tall___________( build )
104.His words made his friend ___________ ( leave ) the room a moment ago .
105.I think people ___________ ( have ) more free time in the future .
106.—_________ the Browns _________ ( go ) to Shanghai for vacation ? --Yes ,they are .
107.--Will there be _________ ( little ) water in the future than now ? --Yes , there will .
108.The _________ (much ) you give , the happier you will be .
109.Everyone should play a part in _________ (use) less water .
110.I picked up all pieces of ________ (paper ) in the classroom after school .
111. It’s ___________ (danger ) to cross the street when the traffic light is red .
112.The boy _________ (fall ) down the bike and broke his left leg yesterday .
113.__________ ( not drink ) too much when you are hungry .
114.Could you cut up some _____________ (watermelon ) for me ?
115.—How many __________ ( spoon ) of sugar do you want ? — We need two .
116.My daughter _________ ( final ) answered my question .
117.I’d like to make beef _________ (noodle) for dinner tonight .
118.There are three ________ (cup ) of yogurt on the table .
119.Let’s make tomato soup ________ (one ) .
120.It ’s necessary for us ___________ ( learn ) English well .
121.Hoe many __________ (sandwich) are there on the plate ?
122.It ’s time for us ________ (go ) to school .
123.Thanksgiving is always on the _________ (four ) Thursday in November in the US.
124.We don’t have enough apples at home .We need ________ (buy) more .
125.We need two ________ ( piece )of bread .
126.Do you know how ________ ( plant ) a tree ?
127.Please _________ (put ) the beef into a pot .
128.Let ’s ________ ( go ) out for a walk .
129.—How much ________ ( salt ) do we need ?
130.Would you like ________ ( sing ) a song for the student ?
131.Do you often help your mother _______ ( do ) housework ?
132.She left without _______ (say) a word .
133.My grandparents look forward to ________ ( see ) me .
134.Can you help me __________ ( improve ) my English ?
135.I got an _____________ ( invite ) from Lucy yesterday .
136.My sister feels very cold .I think she _________ (have) the flu now.
137.What about _________ ( invite) Lily and Lucy ?
138.I am very sorry ___________ (hear ) that .
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
154
139.Thanks a lot for _________ (give ) us such beautiful flowers .
140.I ’m not feeling well today ,so I must ________ ( go ) to the doctor .
141.That song __________ (sound ) very nice .
142.Some children refuse __________ ( eat ) vegetables .
143.Can you play tennis with _______ (we ) ？
144. Today is ___________ (two ) , June .
145.There are many _________ (guest ) in my home now .
146.He ________ ( have ) a great time at the party yesterday .
147.If you are late for the party ,we ___________(not let ) you in .
148.--_____ (be ) you going to have an exam tomorrow ? — No ,I ’m not .
149.There will be a class _________ ( meet ) next Friday afternoon .
150.Ben _________________(organize ) a party for us next weekend .
151.If I take a bus ,it __________( be ) very cheap .
152.I don ’t want _________ (some ) milk .153.She works __________ (real ) hard .
154.You’ll become a soccer __________ (play) in the future .
156.Can you give me some __________ (advice ) ?
157.Jim made many ___________ (mistake ) .
158.He does it by __________(he ) .
159.If it______________ (not rain ) tomorrow ,we won’t go to the beach.
160.He was too ___________ (careful) to pass the exam .
161.The teacher asks the students ____________ (clean) the classroom .
162. What ______________(happen) if we have the party today ?
163.If he _______ (be ) late for the meeting, What will happen?
164.Let ’s ________ (ride) our bikes to the countryside .
165.Morning is a good time __________ (read) English .
◇总第 61 课时
2014 新人教版八年级英语上册期末复习题（五）
二. 句型转换。
1.If I go to the party, I'll bring them some flowers .( 对划线部分提问）
_____ ______ _____ bring ______if you go to the party?
2.Study hard, and you'll pass the English exam.
______ ______study hard, ______pass the English exam
3.Wear jeans, and we won't let you in.=
_____ ______wear jeans, we won't let you in.
4. I will study English hard. I will teach English in a school.( 用 if 合并）
_______________________________________________________________
5. Mary is eighteen years old.( 同义句 ) Mary is __________________________________ girl.
6.We walked for another two hours.( 同义句 ) We walked for ________________________ hours.
7.I go to dance three times a week.( 对划线部分提问 ) _______________________ do you go to dance?
8.Do you want to come? (同义句 ) ____________ you ____________ to come?
9.Tom isn’ t as good as Tim at playing the drum.(同义句 )
Tom is ____________ at playing the drum ________________Tim.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
155
10.She is taller than any other student in her class.( 同义句 ) She is _______________ student in her class.
11.I think my mother is smarter than my father.( 否定句 )
I ______________ my mother _______________ smarter than my father.
12.What do you think of the movie?( 同义句 ) _______________________________ the movie?
13. He is going to go to a cooking school. ( 对划线部分提问 ) is he going to ？
14.My father wants to be a pilot. ( 写出一般疑问句 ) your father to be a pilot?
15.It’s a good time to make resolutions at the beginning of the year.( 写出同义句 )
The of the year is a good time for resolutions.
16.Will you make a model plane for her? ( 写出同义句 ) you to make a model plane for her?
17.The resolution is so hard that he can ’t keep it. ( 写出同义句 )
The resolution is hard for him keep.
18.I hope to find out what ’s happening around the world.( 同义句 )
I hope to find out what ’s around the world.
19.They may not be very excited.( 同义句 ) they very excited.
20.Do you want to watch the news?( 同义句 ) you to watch the news?
21.He never wants to watch a game show, ?(完成反意问句 )
22.John wants to watch talk shows because they’re enjoyable.(对划线部分提问 )
John to watch talk show?
23.Over 80 years ago, he first appeared in the cartoon Steamboat While.( 同义句 )
80 years ago, he first appeared in the cartoon Steamboat While.
24.What do you think of talk show?( 同义句 ) do you talk show?
25.The other cartoons are not as famous as Mickey?( 同义句 )
Mickey is the other cartoons.
Mickey is the other cartoons.
Mickey is of all the cartoons.
26.I like singing. My sister likes singing, too.( 合并为一个句子 )
My sister and I singing.
27.Sue is twelve years old. Gina is fourteen years old.( 合并一个句子 )
Sue is Gina.
Gina is Sue.
Sue isn’t Gina.
Gina isn’t Sue.
28.I think he is good at playing soccer.( 改为否定句 )
I he good at playing soccer.
29.John enjoys swimming. Peter enjoys swimming, too.( 合并为一句 )
John Peter swimming.
30.Jim is twelve years old. Tim is twelve years old, too.( 合并为一句 )
Jim is Tim.
31.Huang lei isn ’t good at tennis as Larry.( 同义句 )
Larry is Huang Lei.
32.The English Student Center needs a weekend student helper for primary school student.( 提问 )
the English Study Center for primary school student?
33. Larry works harder than Huang Lei.( 改为否定句 )
Larry harder than Huang Lei.
2018 年秋学期八年级英语教学设计
156
34..I always eat junk food ，(改为否定句 ) I __________ eat junk food.
35.I seldom( 几乎不 )eat junk food.( 改为同义句 ) I______ _________ eat junk food.
36.Mary is 16 years old.( 改为同义句 ) Mary is girl.
37.I go to school five days a week.( 提问 ) do you go to school a week?
38. I sleep nine hours every night. ( 对画线部分提问 ) ________ _______ do you sleep ？
39.She usually watches TV for over two hours a day.( 同义句 )
She usually watches TV for two hours a day.
微信/支付宝扫码支付下载